Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Owner’s Manual
Model: CP205/CP185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Safety Instructions
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS
Examples of Picture Symbols
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
FIRE OR ELECTRIC
denotes that care should be taken.
The example instructs the user to take care
not to allow fingers to be trapped.
CAUTION
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
denotes a prohibited operation.
The example instructs that disassembly of
the product is prohibited.
AVIS : RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
- NE PAS OUVRIR.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lighting flash with arrowhead symbol, within
denotes an operation that should be
carried out.
The example instructs the user to remove the
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the leterature accompanying the
product.
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user
to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage"
within the product's enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
power cord plug from the AC outlet.
Read all the instructions before using the product.
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following.
Indicates a potential hazard that could result in death
or serious injury if the product is handled incorrectly.
WARNING
Pulling the AC power cord itself may damage
the cord, causing a fire, electric shock or
short-circuit.
Do not use this product near water - for example, near a bathtub,
washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near a swimming
pool, or the like.
Do not touch the power plug with wet
hands. There is a risk of electrical shock.
Treat the power cord with care as well.
Stepping on or tripping over it can break
or short-circuit the wire inside.
WhendisconnectingtheACpowercord's plug,
always hold the plug and pull it to remove it.
The product should be connected to a
Do not attempt to service the product beyond that
described in the user-maintenance instructions. All
other servicing should be reffered to qualified
service personnel.
120V
230V
240V
power supply only of the type described
in the operatiing instructions or as
marked on the product.
III
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This product in combination with an amplifier
and headphones or speakers, may be capable
or producing sound level that could cause
permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a
long period of time at a high volume level or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ear, you
should consult an audiologist.
This product may be equipped with a polarized
line plug (one blade wider than the other). This
is a safety feature.
If you are unable to insert the plug into the
outlet, contact an electrician to replace your
obsolete outlet.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
Indicates a potential hazard that could result in injury or damage to
the product or other property if the product is handled incorrectly.
CAUTION
The product should be located so that its location or position
does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
Do not use the product in the following areas.
● Areas, such as those near windows, where the product is
exposed to direct sunlight
● Extremely hot areas, or close to heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat.
● Extremely cold areas, such as outside
● Extremely humid areas
Keep the instrument away from electrical
motors, neon signs, fluorescent light
fixture, and other sources of electrical
noises.
● Areas where a large amount of sand or dust is present
● Areas where the product is exposed to excessive vibrations
Care should be taken so that objects do not
fall and liquids are not spilled into the
enclosure through openings. The product shall
not be exposed to dripping or splashing. No
objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the product.
Using the product in such areas may result in product
breakdown.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in
OFF
use. The product is not completely disconnected from
the power supply even when the power switch is
turned off. The power supply cord of the product
should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused
for a long period of time.
When connecting the AC power cord and
other cords, take care not to get them tangled.
Failure to do so may damage them, resulting
in fire, electric shock or short-circuit.
Before connecting cords, make sure that
the power to this product and other devices
is turned OFF.
Failure to do so may cause breakdown of
this product and other devices.
Take care not to drop the product.
Please note that the product is heavy and
must be handled by more than one person.
Dropping the product may result in
breakdown.
OFF
Do not stand on the product or exert
excessive force.
Doing so may cause the product to become
deformed or fall over, resulting in breakdown
or injury.
Do not lean against the product.
Doing so may cause the product to move
unexpectedly, resulting in injury.
IV
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not wipe the product with benzene or thinner.
Doing so may result in discoloration or deformation of
the product.
When cleaning the product, put a soft cloth in
lukewarm water, squeeze it well,then wipe the
product.
The product should be serviced by qualified service personnel
when:
●
●
●
●
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product.
The product has been exposed to rain.
The product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a
marked change in performance.
●
The product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
To reduce the risk of injury, close supervision is necessary
when a product is used near children.
Should an abnormality occur in the product, immediately turn
the power OFF, disconnect the power cord plug, and
Close the topboard when the instrument is not in use.
then contact the shop from which the product was purchased.
FCC Information
CAUTION:
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully
insert.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
ATTENTION:
Pour viter les chocs lectriques, introduire la lame la plus large de
la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au
fond.
Instruction for AC power cord (U.K.)
Do not plug either terminal of the power cord to the ground of the AC
outlet on the wall.
¥ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
¥ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
¥ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a different electrical circuit from the
receiver.
¥ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This instrument complies with the limits for a class B digital apparatus, pursuant to
the Radio Interference
Regulations, C.R.C., c. 1374.
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Table of Contents
Parts and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Thank you for purchasing the Kawai Concert Performer
(CP) Series Ensemble Digital Piano.
Overview
LCD Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Select Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The CP Series piano has been designed to provide you with
the ultimate musical experience, no matter your skill level.
Featuring superbly realistic instrument tones and the most finely
crafted keyboard in its class, the CP is a unique musical instrument
resulting from the combination of Kawai’s seventy-plus years
experience in making acoustic pianos along with cutting-edge
digital music technologies.
Basic Controls
Selecting a Part to Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Splitting the keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Selecting Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Effect Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Effect Priority Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transpose and Octave Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Piano Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
With over 900 different instrument and drum sounds at your
disposal, you will have the flexibility to perform any kind of music
ranging from traditional to contemporary. The Auto-
Accompaniment Styles provides the enjoyment of playing rich,
fully orchestrated music in hundreds of musical genres. Thanks
to the Song Stylist feature, you will never have to worry about
finding the best sounds and style to perform a particular song.
Using a Style
Selecting and Playing a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fill-In and Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Auto Accompaniment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Bass Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1-2 Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Registration Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Style Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Song Stylist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Harmony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
The Concert Performer incorporates many professional
features, such as a 16-track Recorder, Microphone Input, and a
3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive. For the non-player, Kawai’s unique
Concert Magic feature creates the thrill of being a performing
musician simply by tapping any key on the keyboard.
Finally, the CP205 is the world’s first ensemble piano with
a CD-R drive, allowing anyone to make their own audio CD
recordings right on the instrument. The Concert Performer offers
tremendous opportunities for anyone who is interested in learning,
playing, and listening to music. Please read this manual
thoroughly and keep it handy as a reference so that you can get
the most out of this incredible instrument.
Recording a Song
Easy Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Part Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Saving the song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Erasing the song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Advanced Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Real-time Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Track Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
We hope you enjoy every moment that you spend with your
Concert Performer.
VI
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Style Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Punch-In Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Step Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Song Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Bar Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Event Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Temperament . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
MIDI Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Power Up Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Soft Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Mic Harmony and Effect
Creating Your Own Styles
Mic Harmony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
About Mic Harmonis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Mic Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Making a New Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Auto-accompaniment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Making a Style with Phrase Combination . . . . . 89
Style Convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Floppy Disk Operations
Disk Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Saving Data to a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Loading Data from a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . 160
Erasing Data from a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Formatting a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Editing Sounds
Editing the Preset Effect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Making a User Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Playing Songs from a Floppy Disk
CD-R Operations (CP205 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Playing an audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Recording onto a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Closin (Finalizing) Your CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
About songs on Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Selecting a Song from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Controlling Playback of a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Playing with Concert Magic
Getting Assistance: Using Help and Demo
Selecting a Concert Magic Song . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Performing a Concert Magic Song . . . . . . . . . . 109
Concert Magic Song Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . 113
Creating a Concert Magic Song . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Using the Demonstrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Playing Piano Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Touch Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
System EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Virtual Voicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Resonance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Concert Magic Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Pedal Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fill-in Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Solo Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Video Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Effect for Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Appendices
List of Preset Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
List of Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
List of Song Stylist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Concert Magic Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Table of Chord Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Example of Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Introduction
VII
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and Names
2
8
9
22
3
VOLUME
MASTER ACCOMP/SONG
SPECIAL
DEMO
CONDUCTOR
STYLE
BALLAD COUNTRY
SWING &
BIG BAND
50’S &
60’S
POP &
ROCK
BLUES &
GOSPEL
JAZZ &
CONTEMP
LATIN &
ISLAND
EDIT
4
CLASSIC INTIMATE
SOLO
PIANO
KIDS &
HOLIDAY
TRADI-
TIONAL
WALTZ BROADWAY
PIANO
PIANO
USER
RESET
CONCERT
MAGIC
5
6
ACCOMPANIMENT
BASS
INVER
FULL
ONE
1-2
PLAY
USER
ACC ON/OFF
KBD
FINGERED FINGER
SONG
11
17
18
1
STYLIST
METRONOME
FILL IN
BEAT
1
1
2
3
4
4
10
SYNC /
FADE OUT
12
INTRO/ENDING
PIANO
MUSIC
START/
STOP
HELP
1
2
TAP TEMPO
VARIATION
2
3
EXIT
7
13
19
14 15
16
20
1. Power
9. Style (page 26)
Turns the piano on/off.
These buttons are used to select an Accompaniment Style to play along with.
2. Master Volume Slider
10. Accompaniment (page 28)
This slider is used to adjust the overall volume level of the instrument.
These buttons are used to turn the Auto-Accompaniment function on/off, and select
the Auto-Accompaniment mode.
3. Accomp/Song Volume Slider
This slider is used to adjust the volume level of the Auto Accompaniment Styles.
Also used to adjust the volume level of a song played from the CP Recorder or directly
from a floppy disk. This slider does not affect the Master Volume Slider setting.
11. 1-2 Play (page 30)
This button is used to automatically choose an appropriate sound and setup for the
selected style.
4. Demo (page 174)
12. Metronome (page 24)
This button is used to select the built-in demo songs and function demos which
explain important features of the CP piano.
This button is used to turn the Metronome on/off.
13. Tap (page 24, 26)
5. Concert Magic (page 108)
This button is used to tap in the desired tempo for a song or Style.
This button is used to select the built-in Concert Magic songs.
14. Sync/Fade out (page 27)
6. Song Stylist (page 36)
This button is used to select the Song Stylist Registrations.
When active, the accompaniment style will start as soon as you play a note or chord
on the keyboard. Press this button while a Style is playing to fade in or out of the
Style.
7. Piano Music (page 177)
This button is used to select the built-in piano music.
15. Start/Stop (page 27)
This button is used to start and stop the accompaniment style.
8. Style Conductor (page 76)
These buttons are used to modify or create your own Accompaniment Styles.
P. 2
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
22
29
25
SOUND
DRAWBAR ORGAN
DISPLAY
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO
FEATURE
GUITAR
VOCAL
BASS
CONTROL
STRING
DRUM
BRASS
USER
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
33
34
HARPSI &
MALLET
PAD &
SYNTH SPECIALTY
TEMPO / VALUE
SFX
26
21
PART
LEFT/
SPLIT
PIANO
ONLY
2
RIGHT
1
SOLO
PORTAMENTO
37
38 39
ADVANCED
40
35
36
MEDIA
MIC
HARMONY
HARMONY EFFECT RECORDER SYSTEM
DISK
CD
TRANSPOSE
30
31
27
28
REGIST
REGISTRATION
RECORDER
GROUPS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RESET
REC
PLAY/STOP
RWD
FWD
OCTAVE SHIFT
STYLE LOCK
SAVE
REGIST
24
32
41
22
23
16. Intro/Ending (page 27)
23. Save Regist
These buttons are used to play an intro section that leads into the style. If you press
this button while the stye is playing an ending section will be played before stopping.
This button is used to save up to 160 of your own favorite panel settings.
24. Regist Groups (page 31)
17. Fill-in (page 28)
These buttons are used to select one of the four short fill-in sections that embellish
the style and lead into the different variation sections of the Style.
This button is used to select one of the 20 groups of preset and user sound
registrations.
25. Display Control (page 146)
18. Variation (page 28)
This button is used to access and adjust settings for the LCD screen.
These buttons are used to select one of the four variation sections within the chosen
Style.
26. Tempo/Value Dial (page 8)
This dial is used to adjust tempo, scroll through different selections, and adjust data
values for items on the LCD screen.
19. Help (page 172)
These buttons are used to access Help menus which contain explanations of the CP
piano’s features.
27. Transpose (page 22)
This button is used to change the overall pitch of the CP in half-note steps.
20. Exit
28. Octave Shift (page 22)
These buttons are used to change the overall pitch of the CP in octave steps.
This button is used to back up to the next-higher screen level. Repeatedly pressing
the Exit button from any screen on the CP will bring you back to the CP’s main play
screen.
29. Sound Selection (page 11)
These buttons are used to select the desired sound category. Use the SELECT buttons
or the DIAL to select a sound within the category.
21. LCD Screen
Displays information about the CP’s current sound selections, settings, options, etc.
30. Part (page 9)
22. Select Buttons
Selects which of the four parts (Left/Split, Right 1, Right 2, Solo) are active andready
to be played with the sounds assigned to them.
These buttons are used to select items displayed on the LCD screen.
Basic Controls
P. 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pedals
Front Terminals
43
44
45
46
47
48
31. Piano Only (page 25)
37. MIC Harmony/Effect (page 148)
This button is used to automatically assign the Concert Grand sound to the Right 1
part.
This button turns on/off the MIC Harmony/Effect for the Microphone jack. Press
and hold the button to select the MIC Harmony/Effect settings menu.
32. Registrations (page 31)
38. Advanced Recorder (page 47)
These buttons are used to recall one of the eight panel settings available in the
currently selected Registration group.
This button is used to access the Advanced Recorder functions.
39. System (page 116)
33. Reverb (page 15)
This button is used to access the system settings menu.
This button turns on/off the Reverb. Press and hold the button to select the Reverb
settings menu.
40. Media Disk/CD (page 102, 156, 166)
These buttons are used to access the Floppy Disk functions and CD-R Drive functions
(CP205 only).
34. Chorus (page 16)
This button turns on/off the Chorus. Press and hold the button to select the Chorus
settings menu.
41. Recorder (page 42)
Used to record and play back a song.
35. Effects (page 18)
This button turns on/off the Effects. Press and hold the button to select the Effect
settings menu.
42. Disk Drive
Reads and writes data to a standard 3.5” floppy disk..
43. Soft Pedal
36. Harmony (page 40)
Depressing this pedal softens the sound and reduces its volume. This pedal can
also be assigned to control other functions. (See page 127)
This button turns on/off the Harmony for the instrument sounds. Press and hold the
button to select the Harmony settings menu.
P. 4
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Terminals
49
54
55
56
50
51
53
52
44. Sostenuto Pedal
51. Line Out Jacks
Depressing this pedal after playing the keyboard and before releasing the keys
sustains the sound of only the keys just played. This pedal can also be assigned to
control other functions. (See page 128)
These jacks are used to provide stereo output of the CP’s sound to amplifiers, tape
recorders or similar equipment. The audio signal coming through the LINE IN jacks
is also routed to these jacks.
45. Sustain Pedal
52. Line In Jacks
Sustains the sound after lifting your hands from the keyboard. The sustain pedal is
capable of responding to half pedaling.
These jacks are used to connect stereo outputs from other audio equipment or
electronic instruments to the CP’s speakers. The audio signal coming through these
jacks bypasses the CP’s volume control.
46. Headphone Jacks
These jacks are used to connect up to two headphones to the CP piano.
53. MIDI-USB Switch
Switches between the MIDI jacks and USB jack.
47. Mic In Volume
This knob adjusts volume level of the microphone input.
54. MIDI Jacks
These jacks are used to connect external MIDI devices to the CP. Enabled only
when the MIDI-USB switch is set to MIDI.
48. Microphone Jack
This jack is used to connect a microphone or other comparable mic-level sound
source.
55. USB Jacks
This jack is used to connect a personal computer to the CP. Enabled only when the
MIDI-USB switch is set to USB.
49. EXP Pedal
This jack is used to connect an optional expression pedal.
56. Receptacle for Pedal Cable
This jack is used to connect the cable from the pedal unit.
50. Video Out
This jack is used to connect the CP to a TV set or external monitor display.
Basic Controls
P. 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
This manual provides you with all the information you will need in
order to take full advantage of the Concert Performer’s potential.
Before you begin learning how to use the specific features, it is
important to understand some of the basic ideas behind the
instrument’s design.
features that it is simply impractical to have a dedicated button for
every single one. As a result, many features and functions are
selected by choosing them from lists, or “menus”, that are presented
to you on the CP’s large display screen. Often times selecting an
item from a menu may access another “sub-menu” of options
specific to that item. This system of menus and sub-menus keeps
everything logical and straightforward and becoming familiar with
how to make your way through them is very easy.
The Concert Performer has been designed to have an easy and
intuitive user interface. However, the instrument has so many
LCD Screen
The LCD Screen is the window through which the Concert Performer communicates with you. The
large display size allows many items to be clearly displayed at the same time, allowing for not only
words but graphics to be shown as well.
Select Buttons
Most of the buttons on the front panel are used to directly select a function on the CP that you
would like to work with. In most cases, the specific function name is printed on the front panel
directly above the button. For example, there are buttons labeled 1-2 PLAY, FILL-IN, and so on. In
this manual, references to these buttons are always printed in capital letters for clarity. Most of
these buttons have an LED Indicator (small light) on them. This Indicator will be turned ON when
a function is in use so that you can quickly see if that function is active.
There are 17 SELECT buttons surrounding the LCD screen that do not have labels printed next to
them because they do not have predetermined functions. Instead, they are used to select whatever
items are currently displayed next to them on the LCD screen. For example, a SELECT button
might be used to select an instrument sound on one screen, while on another screen the same
SELECT button might serve to activate a feature related to Floppy Disk or CD-R Drive operation.
P. 6
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To keep things simple, this manual will refer to the five SELECT buttons along the left side of the
LCD screen as L1-L5. Likewise, the five SELECT buttons along the right side of the screen will be
referred to as R1-R5. The seven SELECT buttons along the bottom of the screen, which are also
known as function buttons, will be referred to as F1-F7.
In some cases when you see an item displayed on the screen and press the L or R button next to it,
that item on the screen will become highlighted (shown in reverse color) to indicate you have
selected that item. Sometimes a submenu screen relating to that item will be displayed and present
you with further options.
When you press one of the F buttons, the corrosponding function on the LCD screen will be
highlighted to indicate that it has been selected.
L1
L2
L3
Selects Style. Use the F2,F3
buttons, Style buttons, or the Dial
to change the active Style.
R1
R2
R3
Selects the SOLO Part. Use the F6, F7
buttons, Sound buttons, or the Dial to
change the Sound.
Selects Tempo. Use the Dial or the
TAP TEMPO button to change the
Tempo
Selects the RIGHT1 Part. Use the F6, F7
buttons, Sound buttons, or the Dial to
change the Sound.
Selects the LEFT Part. Use the F6,
F7buttons, Sound buttons, or the
Dial to change the Sound.
Selects the RIGHT2 Part. Use the F6,
F7buttons, Sound buttons, or the Dial to
change the Sound.
REGIST
GROUPS
HELP
No functions are assigned to the L4 and L5
buttons on this screen.
SAVE
REGIST
No functions are assigned to the R4 and R5
buttons on this screen.
EXIT
"RIGHT1" is highlighted to indicate that this Part
is now selected.
F1
Takes you to the MIXER settings screen.
F2, F3 Selects a Style.
F4, F5 Adjusts the volume level for the Part currently selected.
F6, F7 Selects a sound for the selected Part. "Sound" is highlighted
to indicate this graphic button is active.
Basic Controls
P. 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TEMPO / VALUE
Dial
The Dial is used to change data values and scroll through options that are displayed on the LCD
screen.
When you turn the Dial, you will notice that whatever item on the LCD screen is currently selected
(highlighted) will be affected. Or in some cases when the screen presents you with a list of choices,
turning the Dial will allow you to quickly scroll through the list until you arrive at your choice. It
can also be used instead of the L, R, and F buttons as another way of selecting or changing an item
or value on the LCD screen.
P. 8
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Controls
This chapter discusses the basic operations that are used to play
the Concert Performer, such as sound selection, Part configuration
and effect settings.
Selecting a Part to Play
When the CP’s main play screen is displayed (For example, when the CP is first turned on), you are
presented with four sound Parts that can be played from the keyboard. These four Parts are named
LEFT/SPLIT, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and SOLO, and each one has an instrument sound assigned to it.
You can selectively turn on/off any combination of these four Parts, allowing you to have up to four
different sounds at the same time across the keyboard.
Sounds assigned to Parts RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and SOLO will be layered on top of each other when all
three Parts are active at the same time. Activating the LEFT/SPLIT Part automatically splits the
keyboard so that only the sound that is assigned to the LEFT/SPLIT Part is heard when you play in
the lower octave keys. Each Part has a dedicated button on the front panel that selects and turns
on/off that Part. You can Also select a Part by pressing the appropriate L or R button.
Selecting a Part is easy:
1) Press the PART button for the Part you wish to activate. The PART button LED will light.
2) Press the PART button again to turn that Part off.
• If the LCD screen is currently showing the main play screen, you can tell which Parts are active
by looking at the name of the sound assigned to it. If the name of a sound is in large typeface,
then the Part it is assigned to is active. If the sound name is displayed in small typeface, then the
Part is not active.
This example indicates:
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
RIGHT1 is currently active
SOLO, RIGHT2, LEFT are inactive.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Basic Controls
P. 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Splitting the keyboard.
When the LEFT/SPLIT Part is activated, the CP automatically splits the keyboard and only the
sound assigned to the LEFT/SPLIT Part will be heard when you play below a specified key (split
point) on the keyboard. The default split point is between F2 and F#2 but you can freely change the
split point to any key on the keyboard.
To change the split point:
1) Press the LEFT/SPLIT button to activate the LEFT/SPLIT Part. The LEFT/SPLIT button LED will light
and the LCD screen will display a diagram of the CP’s 88 note keyboard.
2) Press the LEFT/SPLIT button again, and while holding it down, press the desired key on the keyboard
that you want to serve as the split point. The key you press will become the lowest note the Right
hand Parts will play (RIGHT1, RIGHT2, and SOLO). The LEFT/SPLIT sound will be heard when keys
below the split point are played.
You may also use the L4 and R4 buttons to move the split point. On the LCD screen the split point
marker will move across the 88 note keyboard diagram as you press these buttons.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L4
Lowers the split point.
R4
Raises the split point.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
• Moving the split point completely to the LEFT end of the keyboard will allow the LEFT/SPLIT
Part to function as a layer with the three right hand Parts. In this manner you can create four
part layered across the entire keyboard.
P. 10
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Portamento for the Solo Part
The Solo Part is monophonic (only plays one note at a time) regardless of which sound is assigned
to it. You can use Portamento on this Part. Portamento is a gradual slide in pitch from one note to
the next, and is useful for adding very expressive qualities to many instruments.
To use Portamento:
1) Press the PORTAMENTO button. The PORTAMENTO button LED will light.
2) Press the button again to turn Portamento off.
You can adjust the Portamento Time, which determines how quickly the pitch will slide from one
note to the next. You can also set the note priority for Portamento. (See “Solo Settings” on page
131).
Selecting Sounds
The Concert Performer has over 900 instrument and drum sounds available from the front panel.
You can freely assign any of these sounds to the four Parts. Remember that there is always a sound
assigned to each of the Parts, even if some of the Parts are not currently active.
The sounds span a tremendous variety of instruments, ranging from traditional acoustic sounds to
modern electronic tones. To help you quickly find the sound that you want, the sounds have been
organized into 15 categories. Each category has a dedicated Sound Selection button on the front
panel.
To select a Sound:
1) In the main play screen, select the Part to which you wish to assign a new sound using the L3, or R1-
R3 buttons. The selected Part will become highlighted.
SOUND
DRAWBAR ORGAN
WOOD-
PIANO
FEATURE
GUITAR
VOCAL
BASS
STRING
DRUM
BRASS
USER
WIND
The USER button lets you select any sounds
that may be stored in the User Sound category.
HARPSI &
MALLET
PAD &
SYNTH SPECIALTY
SFX
Basic Controls
P. 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) Press the SOUND button for the sound category that your are interested in. The first page of sounds in
that category will be displayed. There are at least three pages of sounds in each category (except
User). Use the F1-6 buttons to view the other pages in a category.
3) Select a sound by pressing the L or R button that is next to the displayed name.
4) Press the F1-F6 buttons to show the Sounds on the other pages for the same category.
5) You can also use the Dial to scroll through all of the categories and sounds one by one.
Use the L or R buttons to select your desired Sound.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1-F6 Selects the different pages of Sounds within a category.
F7
Takes you to the Sound Edit menu. (See "Editing Sounds"
on page 96.)
P. 12
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mixer
This Mixer screen allows you to change the volume, panning, reverb and chorus levels, as well as
turn the effect on/off for each Part.
To use the Mixer:
1) Press the MIXER button (F1) while on the main play screen.
2) Use the F2–F7 buttons to select which Part you wish to adjust.
3) Use the L and R buttons to select a setting to change.
4) Use the Dial to change the value.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Selects the Effect On and Off.
Selects reverb level.
Selects chorus level.
Selects Panning.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects volume level.
L 5
R 5
After you make your desired selection, use the Dial to
change the value.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2–F6 Selects the part to change.
F7 Adjusts the volume level for the Harmony.
Takes you to the next page of the Mixer.
• Volume level can be also adjusted from the main play screen, using the VOLUME buttons (F4,
F5).
Basic Controls
P. 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Mixer not only lets you set the overall volume level for the Style, but set individual volume
levels for the 6 Sections within a Style.
To adjust the individual Section level:
1) On the Mixer screen, press the STYLE MIXER button (F1). The Style Mixer screen will be selected.
2) Use the F2–F7 buttons to choose a Section, then use the Dial to change the volume.
3) Press the BACK button (F1) to go back the previous Mixer screen, or press the EXIT button to go back
to the main play screen.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the previous Mixer screen.
F2–F7 Selects the Section that you wish to change.
P. 14
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effects
You might have noticed that when you select some of the sounds, the LED indicator for the REVERB,
CHORUS, or EFFECTS button is turned on. The reason for this is some of the sounds are set up
with one or more of these effects on as part of their initial setting.
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
Adding an effect to the sound enhances tonal quality and improves acoustical realism. The CP
piano is provided with three separate groups of effects. The first is REVERB, the second is CHORUS,
and third group EFFECTS contains other useful effects such as Delay, Phaser, Rotary Speaker etc.
There is a dedicated button on the front panel for each Effects group and each of the three Effect
groups can be turned on/off separately or used in combination for each part. The Concert Performer
has a selection of 27 different Reverb, Chorus, and Effect types that can be used to enhance or even
dramatically alter the instrument sounds. Each of the over 900 instrument and drum sounds has
already been assigned a REVERB and CHORUS setting and an additional EFFECT that suits that
particular type of instrument. For example, a moderate Delay effect is used on the Church Organ to
recreate the sense of being in a large church, and a Rotary speaker effect is used on the Drawbar
organ to give it an authentic, vintage feel.
If you wish, you can change any of these effect settings to suit your tastes separately for each sound
save them as the new Preset effect settings for that Sound (See Sound Edit on page 96). In addtion,
by setting the Effect For Sound function in the System to “Panel” the CP will ignore the preset
effects settings for each Sound (see Effect For Sound on page 133).
(The CP piano can also remember your Effect settings as part of a Registration. See Registration on
page 31.)
To add Reverb :
1) Press the REVERB button. The REVERB button LED will light.
2) If you wish to edit the settings, hold down the REVERB button for a moment until the Reverb Settings
screen is displayed.
3) Use the F3-F7 buttons to select the Part you want to edit.
4) Use the L2-L4 buttons to select the specific setting that you wish to change.
5) Use the Dial to change the value.
6) Press the EXIT button to leave the Reverb Settings menu.
7) If you wish to turn the reverb effect off, press the REVERB button again.
Basic Controls
P. 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Selects the Reverb type. Use the Dial to choose
one of the 7 Reverb types.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects Reverb on/off. Use the Dial to turn the
Reverb on/off for the selected Part.
Selects Reverb depth. Use the Dial to change
the Reverb depth for the selected Part.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F3–F6 Selects the Part you want to change. Repeatedly pressing
the appropriate button also turns the Reverb on/off for
that Part.
Type of Reverb
Hall 1, Hall 2
Simulates the ambiance of a concert hall or theater.
Stage 1, Stage 2 Simulates the ambiance of a small hall or live house.
Room 1, Room 2 Simulates the ambiance of a living room or small rehearsal room.
Plate
Simulates the sound of a metallic plate reverb.
• The LED Indicator on the REVERB button will be lit whenever Reverb is turned on for the any
Part except ACC (regardless of each part’s Effect Priority). See “Effect Priority Guidelines”
later in this chapter for an explanation of Effect Priority.
To add Chorus:
1) Press the CHORUS button. The CHORUS button LED will light.
2) If you wish to edit the settings, hold down the CHORUS button for a moment until the Chorus Settings
screen is displayed.
3) Use the F3–F6 buttons to select the Part you want to edit
4) Use the L2–L4 buttons to select the specific setting that you wish to change.
P. 16
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) Turn the Dial to change the value.
6) Press the EXIT button to leave the Chorus Settings menu.
7) If you wish to turn the chorus off, press the CHORUS button again.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Selects the Chorus type. Use the Dial to choose
one of the 4 Chorus types.
Selects Chorus on/off. Use the Dial to turn the
Chorus on/off for the selected Part.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects Chorus depth. Use the Dial to change
the Chorus depth for the selected Part.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F3–F6 Selects the Part you want to change. Repeatedly pressing the
appropriate button also turns the Chorus on/off for that Part.
• The Indicator light on the CHORUS button will be lit only when Chorus is turned on for the
active “Priority Part”. See “Effect Priority Guidelines” later in this chapter for an explanation of
this.
• You can select from four chorus types when in the Chorus Settings menu. There is a fifth chorus
type which is assigned as an Effect from the Effect Settings menu. In this way, you can actually
have two chorus effects active if so desired.
Basic Controls
P. 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To add an Effect:
1) Press the EFFECT button. The EFFECT button LED will light.
2) If you wish to edit the settings, hold down the button for a moment until the Effect Settings screen is
displayed.
3) Use the F3–F6 button to turn ON/OFF the Effect for each part.
4) Use the L2–L5, R3 buttons to select the specific setting that you wish to change.
5) Turn the Dial to change the value.
6) Press the EXIT button to leave the Effect Settings screen.
7) If you wish to turn the Effect off, push the EFFECTS button again.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Selects Effect type. Use the Dial to choose one
of the 16 Effect types.
Selects Wet Balance. Use the Dial to change the
value.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
R3
Selects a different editable setting for
each Effect type. Use the Dial to
change the value.
Selects a different editable setting for each Effect
type. Use the Dial to change the value.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F3–F6 Turns the Effect on/off for each Part.
P. 18
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Types
Chorus
Simulates the rich character of a vocal choir or string ensemble, by layering a
slightly detuned version of the sound over the original to enrich it.
Flanger
Creates a shifting comb-filter, which adds motion and a “hollow” tone to the
sound.
Celeste
A three-phase chorus without modulation.
Ensemble
Delay 1-3
A three-phase chorus with a slight modulation to each phase.
Adds echoes to the sound. The three types differ in the length of time between
the echoes.
Auto Pan
Tremolo
Moves the sound left and right across the stereo field at a variable rate.
Modulates the volume of the sound. This is a vibrato type effect.
Tremulant
A combination of Tremolo and Vibrato. It simulates the tremulant pipes of a
church organ.
Phaser
Creates a phase change, adding motion to the sound.
Rotary 1-2
This effect simulates the sound of the Rotary Speaker cabinet commonly used
with electric organs. Rotary 2 adds distortion. The soft pedal is used to change
the speed of the rotor between SLOW and FAST.
Auto Wah
Sweeps a tone filter up and down at the beginning of a note, recreating the popular
vintage wah wah pedal sound.
Enhancer
Distortion
Emphasizes high frequencies to make a sound more easily discernible in a mix.
Adds frequencies that were not present in the original sound, resulting in a “fuzzy”
or warmer tone.
Basic Controls
P. 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect Priority Guidelines
Reverb and Chorus are global effects. In other words, all of the Parts and the Accompaniment Style
must share the same Reverb and Chorus type. However each of these Parts can have a different
amount of Reverb and Chorus applied to them. In addition Reverb and Chorus can be independently
turned on/off for each part. However, since the CP’s EFFECT section can only have one Effect
turned on at a time (in addition to the REVERB and CHORUS), what happens if you have two (or
more) Parts active, with entirely different sounds, each with a different Effect setting?
In these cases, the CP’s Effects section can only use the Effect settings for one of the Parts. The
EFFECT section chooses which Effect settings to use based upon a predetermined priority order
for each of the Parts. The Priority order is SOLO > RIGHT 1> RIGHT 2 > LEFT/SPLIT. The preset
effect settings for the Priority Part will be used and the other Parts will either share these settings
or may have their Effects automatically turned off.
This “Priority Part” depends on the current situation. If you only have one Part active, regardless
of which Part it is, the preset effect settings for that sound will be used. If you have two or more
Parts active, then the CP will treat one of them as the Priority Part, and ignore the settings of the
other(s).
If the the Effect For Sound is set to “Panel” in the System then the Preset effect settings for each
Sound will be ignored and the Part Priority will be ignored. (See Effect For Sound on page 131).
Here are some guidelines for Effect Priority:
• Priority is given to the Parts in the following order: SOLO>RIGHT1>RIGHT2>LEFT. This means
that anytime the SOLO Part is active, its Effect settings will be used, not only for its sound but
for any sound in any other Part, that you want to add effects to. Likewise, the only time an
active LEFT Part’s settings will be applied is if the other 3 Parts are inactive.
• Unlees you change them, the Effect settings will only change in response to a change in the
Priority Part being activated/deactivated, or a new sound is assigned to an active Priority Part.
In the latter case, the new Effect settings will reflect the Preset effect settings for the new
sound.
• When the Effect settings change for the Piority Part, the Effects will be automatically turned off
for the other Parts. (This is so that your Flute sound on RIGHT2 doesn’t suddenly get effected
by the Distortion settings of the Electric Guitar that you’ve just assigned to the SOLO Part!)
• You can, however, turn the effect on for any Part by adjusting the Effect On/Off option in the
display for that Part.
P. 20
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The LED Indicator on the EFFECT and CHORUS buttons will be on only when the active Priority
Part has these effects turned on.
Example
Assume that your CP is set up according to the following chart:
SOLO
Inactive
On
RIGHT1
Active
On
RIGHT 2
Inactive
Off
LEFT
Active
On
INDICATOR
On
Part
Effect
If you then select a different sound for RIGHT1, the Effect setting for the SOLO, RIGHT2, LEFT will
be turned off automatically. This is because RIGHT1 is the Priority Part (note that the SOLO Part is
NOT the Priority Part because it was inactive).
The chart would now look like this:
SOLO
Inactive
Off
RIGHT1
Active
On
RIGHT 2
Inactive
Off
LEFT
Active
Off
INDICATOR
On
Part
Effect
Even if you now assign a new sound to the SOLO Part, the Effect settings for the other Parts won’t
change, because SOLO is still inactive, so therefore would not have priority.
Once you make the SOLO Part active, however, it would now be considered the Priority Part. The
Effect settings for the other Parts will again be turned off. The Indicator light on the EFFECT
button will now reflect the Effect status for the sound assigned to SOLO.
SOLO
Active
Off
RIGHT1
Active
Off
RIGHT 2
Inactive
Off
LEFT
Active
Off
INDICATOR
Off
Part
Effect
At this point, if the Effect that has been called up along with the SOLO sound is one that you’d like
to use for the other Parts, simply select Effect On in the LCD display for those Parts.
Basic Controls
P. 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transpose and Octave Shift
Transpose raises or lowers the CP’s pitch in half- step increments. Octave Shift does the same but
in octave increments.
TRANSPOSE
Transpose can be especially useful when you have learned a song in one key and have to play it in
another key. The transpose feature allows you to play the song in the original key, but hear it in
another key. You can transpose the Concert Magic songs, the Accompaniment Styles, any songs
played back by the Easy/Advanced Recorder and any of the over 900 instrument and drum sounds
available in the CP. Songs recorded on the CD-R Drive cannot be transposed once they have been
recorded.
OCTAVE SHIFT
Octave shift can be very useful when you are playing multiple sounds across the keyboard. You
may want to use the octave shift to adjust a bass sound assigned to the LEFT/SPLIT Part to play in
the proper pitch range, or to set one sound in a layer to play in a different octave so that it mixes
well with other sounds in the layer. Octave shift is only available for the four Parts: LEFT/SPLIT,
RIGHT1, RIGHT 2, and SOLO.
To Transpose:
1) Press either the ß or † TRANSPOSE buttons. The LCD screen shows you a number telling you how
many half steps up or down you have transposed the piano. -5, for example, represents a transposition
that is 5 half steps lower.
2) To cancel the Transpose setting, press both the ß and † buttons at the same time. The transpose
amount will disappear from the LCD screen, indicating that the CP is now back to its original setting.
To use the Octave Shift:
1) Select the Part that you would like to apply the shift to.
2) Press either the ß or † OCTAVE SHIFT buttons. The number of shifted octaves (up or down) will be
displayed with an “ ß” in the LCD screen.
3) To cancel the octave shift, press both the ß and † buttons at the same time. The symbols will
disappear from the screen, indicating that the selected Part is back to its normal octave range.
P. 22
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
R2
R3
Selects the SOLO Part to be Transposed or
Octave Shifted.
Selects the RIGHT1 Part to be Transposed
or Octave Shifted.
L3
Selects the LEFT Part to be Transposed or Octave
Shifted.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the RIGHT2 Part to be Transposed
or Octave Shifted.
L 5
R 5
The number of octaves shifted is represented by
the number of triangles shown above the sound
name for each Part.
Transpose amount is shown at the bottom of the
screen.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
• The Octave Shift has a range of four octaves in each direction. However, some on board sounds
may have a limited range in which they play properly. If you shift too far out of this range, the
instrument may sound strange or may not play at all. This has no affect on the CP’s proper
function though, and you should feel encouraged to use this feature as a means of getting
interesting tonal variations out of the preset Sounds.
Basic Controls
P. 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Metronome
Rhythm is one of the most important elements when learning music. It is important to practice
playing the piano at the correct tempo and with a steady rhythm. The CP piano’s metronome is a
tool that helps you to achieve this by providing a steady beat for you play along with.
To use the Metronome:
METRONOME
TAP TEMPO
1) Press the METRONOME button. The CP piano will start counting with an audible steady beat. You
will see Volume level, Beat (time signature), as well as the Metronome icon appear in the LCD
screen next to the Tempo value.
2) Use the BEAT, VOLUME, or TEMPO buttons (F2–F7) to select the setting you wish to change.
3) Use the F buttons (F2-F7) or the Dial to change the values.
You can also adjust the tempo by tapping on the TAP TEMPO button. Simply tap on the button with
your finger three or more times at the desired tempo, and the CP will automatically translate that
into a tempo value on the screen!
4) To stop the metronome, press the METRONOME button again.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Mixer menu.
F2, F3 Changes the Beat. Choose from 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4,
6/8, 7/8, 9/8 and 12/8 time signatures.
F4, F5 Adjusts the volume level.
F6, F7 Adjusts the tempo.
P. 24
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Piano Only
The Piano Only button provides a way to quickly set the Concert Performer up to play the Concert
Grand piano sound. Pressing the Piano Only button immediately turns off all Parts except the Right
1 part and sets the Right 1 sound to Concert Grand.
PIANO
ONLY
The Piano Only button also turns off all auto-accompaniment functions and stops the Easy/Advanced
Recorder. Additionally, pressing the Piano Only button will cause the CP to exit any function or
editing screen (except for Concert Magic) and immediately return to the Main Screen.
We you are using Concert Magic, pressing the Piano Only button will change the Concert Magic
song’s preset sounds to Concert Grand piano.
• You can also use the Piano Only button as a “panic button” to immediately stop any unintended
accompaniment style or recording, or to quickly exit any confusing situation and return to a
familiar piano sound.
To use Piano Only:
Press the PIANO ONLY button. The Main Screen is displayed and the Concert Grand sound is assigned
to RIGHT1.
Basic Controls
P. 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a Style
The Concert Performer contains 220 built-in Styles for you to play
along with covering a wide variety of musical genres. You can
choose from a simple drum or percussion accompaniment or add
in a fully orchestrated arrangement. In addition to the Full Styles
which provide a full musical arrangement including Drums, Bass,
and other accompanying instruments there are Intimate Styles with
simpler more “Intimate” arrangements. There is also a selection of
Solo Piano Styles if you just want to play along with a piano
accompaniment. If the on board variety of styles is not enough, or
if you have creative ideas of your own, the CP contains other
features such as Style Maker and Conductor to help you edit or
create your own custom Styles. These features are explained in
the section of this manual “Creating Your Own Styles”, page 76.
Selecting and Playing a Style
Just like the Sounds the Styles are organized into 15 categories, each with a dedicated STYLE SELECT
button on the front panel.
To select a Style:
1) Press the STYLE button for the category of your choice. The LCD screen will display the the first Style
Selection page for that category.
2) Press the L or R button next to the on-screen name of the Style you wish to select.
3) Each Style category has two pages of styles. If you don't see your desired Style on the currently
displayed page, you can use the F1- F2 buttons to select the other page. Press another STYLE button
to jump to another category, or turn the Dial to scroll through all the Styles one by one.
4) If you wish play the selected Style, press either
the START/STOP button to start the Style playing immediately,
or the INTRO/ENDING button to start the Style with an Intro pattern.
You can also press the SYNC/FADE OUT button before starting a Style or pressing the INTRO/END
buttons. When the SYNCFADE OUT button is pressed, the Style will not start until you play a note or
chord on the keyboard.
5) To adjust the tempo of the Style, select Tempo on the main play screen and use the Dial to change the
Tempo.
You can also use the TAP TEMPO button. Tap the button three or more times at the desired tempo,
and the CP will automatically translate your taps into an on-screen Tempo value.
6) To stop the Style, press either,
the START/STOP button to stop the Style immediately,
or the INTRO/ENDING button to stop with an ending pattern,
You can also press the SYNC/FADE OUT button and have the Style fade out gradually.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the L or R buttons to select your desired Style.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Select the different pages within a Style category.
SYNC /
When this button is pressed before starting a Style or before pressing the
INTRO/ENDING button, the Style will not start until you play a note or chord
on the keyboard. When this button is pressed while the Style is running the
Style will gradually fade out. When this button is pressed during a fade out
the Style will gradually fade back in and you may resume playing the Style.
You can press the SYNC/FADE OUT button at any time while any of the
patterns (Intro, Variation, Ending) in the Style are running to fade in or out
of the Style.
FADE OUT
START/
STOP
Starts or stops the Style immediately.
When one of these buttons is pressed to start a Style the selected Intro
pattern will be played before the selected Variation pattern plays. There are
both major and minor versions for each Intro. The Auto-accompaniment
System will decide which Intro to use based upon the first Chord you play
(major or minor). The LCD screen will display a countdown in bars to show
how many bars you have until the the variation begins playing. When one
of these buttons is pressed while the Style is running the selected Ending
pattern will be played before the Style stops. There are major and minor
versions for each Ending.
INTRO/ENDING
1
2
• When you are in the main play screen, you can select a Style by just using the Dial. Press the L1
button or F2–F3 (STYLE) and “Style” will become highlighted. Use the Dial or press the F2–F3
button to select another Style.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The CP remembers the last Style selection that you made within each category while the power
is on. When you press a STYLE button, the CP will automatically select the Style previously
chosen in the same category.
• When you switch from one Style to another while it is running, the new Style will wait until the
beginning of the next measure before it begins to play.
Fill-In and Variation
Each Style is made of four Variation patterns and four Fill-in patterns.
FILL IN
1
1
2
3
4
4
Fill-ins are short patterns that temporarily embellish the Style. Fill-ins can add excitement and
rhythmic change to the Style and be used as a musical lead in between the Variations. To use a Fill-
in, just press one of the FILL IN buttons. You will hear the fill-in begin playing immediately from a
musically appropriate spot.
VARIATION
2
3
Fill-ins can also be used as a short intro. First press the SYNC/FADE OUT button then press one of
the FILL-IN buttons to select a desired Fill-in. Press any key on the keyboard to start the style. After
the Fill-in plays, the selected Variation will play.
To select a Variation, press one of the four VARIATION buttons to select the desired Variation. The
Selected VARIATION button LED will light.
• You can set the CP to automatically play a Fill-in anytime you press a VARIATION button as you
switch from one Variation to another. Select your preferred option in the Fill-in mode. (See page
130)
Auto Accompaniment System
The Auto-accompaniment System (ACC) is a powerful feature that determines how the Styles will
interact with you as you play. The ACC System analyzes your playing and adjusts the notes the
Style plays to follow the Chords that you play on the keyboard. The ACC System is capable of
recognizing single finger as well as more complex chord voicings. The CP recognizes 61 chord
types as well as most of their inversions. (See page 196 for a chord table.) There are three modes of
key recognition—One Finger, Fingered, and Full Keyboard. Your choice of which mode to use
depends on your skill level and the selected musical style.
ACCOMPANIMENT
BASS
INVER
FULL
ONE
ACC ON/OFF
KBD
FINGERED FINGER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fingered
The player must play at least three notes of a chord below the split point (LEFT/
SPLIT Part) before the ACC System will recognize the chord type. (See page 196
for chord table.)
One Finger
Uses a simplified chord method that allows beginners to specify a chord type by
playing only one or two notes below the split point. The types of chords that can
be recognized in this manner are limited to Major, Minor, 7th and Major 7th.
While the player can trigger basic chords with as little as one finger, the ACC
System will recognize more complex chord types if you play them, even you are
in the One Finger mode.
Full Keyboard The player must play at least three notes of a chord anywhere across the 88 keys
before the ACC System will recognize the chord type. This mode is similar to
Fingered however, Full Keyboard recognizes chord types from three or more
notes played anywhere across the 88 keys not just below the split point.
Bass Inversion
When Bass Inversion is on, the Bass Section of the Style will follow the lowest note of the chord
voicing played on the keyboard. With Bass Inversion on it is possible to specify a chord over a
certain bass note by the chord voicing you play. For example, a C chord over a G bass, or a Bb7
chord over a C Bass. Bass Inversion will work with all three key recognition modes but when in
One Finger mode, you play at least two notes of a chord for Bass Inversion to function.
To turn Auto-accompaniment (ACC) on:
1) Select a Style that you would like to play.
2) Press one of the ACCOMPANIMENT buttons to select the Key Recognition mode. The selected Key
recognition mode will be displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen if you're on the main play screen.
3) Press the BASS INVERSION button if you would like to turn it on.
4) Press the ACC ON/OFF button to activate the Auto-accompaniment System (ACC).
5) Press the START/STOP button to start the Style, and play some chords in the LEFT/SPLIT Part. You
will hear the Style start and also change keys and chord types as you play different chords.
6) If you want to cancel or stop the Auto-accompaniment, press the ACC ON/OFF button again. If you
turn the ACC off without stopping the Style the drum rhythms will continue to play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• When you play along with the Auto-accompaniment using the Fingered or Full Keyboard modes,
you may hear two sounds playing the chords: one is selected by the front panel and the other is
pre programmed for the Style. This is because the sounds used by the Auto-accompaniment
Style are independent of the Left and Right Part sound settings. Therefore you will hear the
instrument sounds played by your hand as well as those generated by the accompaniment.
In most cases, these are just duplicate notes being played using different sounds. In some cases
however, you may hear different notes or an unexpected chord inversion. If the overall musical
effect is undesirable, try turning the LEFT/SPLIT Part off and let the accompaniment play alone.
• You can use the Auto-accompaniment (ACC) System without the Style running. In this way you
can make use of the chord recognition without having the pre programmed rhythms or patterns
playing. Just turn the ACC on and play without starting the Style. You will hear the bass and
chord parts only. This may be useful when you play a musical piece that is not played with
drums. The accompaniment sounds are pre programmed to best suit the different Styles, and
you cannot alter them. When playing in One Finger mode, however, you can replace the chord
sound with the sound chosen for the LEFT/SPLIT Part. Assign your preferred sound and make
the LEFT/SPLIT Part active.
You can also start a Style without the ACC on. In this way you can have just drums and percussion
accompany you.
1-2 Play
If you want to play using an Accompaniment Style, but have no idea as to what sounds you should
use for the right and left-hand parts, try using the 1-2 Play feature. This feature gives you a
preprogrammed panel setup with appropriate sounds and settings for the Style you have chosen.
To use 1-2 Play:
1-2
PLAY
1) Select the Style you would like to play.
2) Press the 1-2 PLAY button. The 1-2 Play indicator will become lit, and the words “ 1-2 Play” are
displayed in the Main Screen. The SYNC button is activated as well.
3) Activate one of the INTO/ENDING buttons if you want the Style to begin with an introduction. Start the
Style by playing a key on the left side of the keyboard, or by pressing the START/STOP button.
4) Press the 1-2 PLAY button again to turn it off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Among the settings contained in the 1-2 Play setting are the Sounds assigned to the keyboard
Parts (Solo, Right 1/2, Left), Tempo, and Mixer settings.
Registration
A Registration is a setup that remembers the panel settings along with many other performance
functions so that you can recall them at the touch of a button. This lets you begin to play quickly
instead of spending a lot of time programming all the settings and values manually.
There are 8 Registration buttons on the panel of the Concert Performer. Each button contains a
different registration. Pressing any of the Registration buttons activates the setup stored there.
Pressing another Registration button changes to the registration stored in that button. Pressing the
active Registration button again deactivates the registration and returns you to the original panel
setup.
Registration Groups
There are 20 Registration Groups in the Concert Performer. Each group contains settings for the 8
Registration buttons on the panel. Each group represents a “family” of settings for the CP. The
sound and performance capability of the Concert Performer is remarkable, and each registration
group is designed to take full advantage of certain types of sounds available in the instrument.
Switching from one Registration Group to another instantly changes the Registration buttons from
Pipe Organ settings to Orchestra settings, for example.
• The default Registration Group is “American Pop”, a family of registrations designed to play
popular music from the 1940’s through today.
With 8 Registration buttons and 20 Registration Groups, you have a total of 160 preprogrammed
Registrations available. Plus, you can overwrite any registration with your own unique setups.
To use a Registration:
REGIST
GROUPS
1) Press the REGIST GROUP button. Ten Registration Groups will be displayed.
2) Press the F1 and F2 buttons to view the Registration Groups on the other page.
3) Highlight any Group from the list by using the L and R buttons.
4) Press one of the eight REGISTRATION buttons to activate a Registration from your selected Registration
Group.
5) To return to the Main Screen, press the EXIT button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the L and R buttons to select the Group. Then
press one of eight REGISTRATION buttons to call
the desired setup.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2
F6, F7
Searches for the Registration Groups on the other pages.
Takes you to the Registration Group Name screen.
• The CP remembers how the front panel was setup before you chose a Registration so that after
exiting the Registration, the prior settings will be restored.
• It is not necessary to always begin with the REGIST GROUP button when selecting a Registration.
If the group you want to use is already selected, pressing one of the REGISTRATION buttons will
activate a setup from that group. The CP will remember the Registration Group last chosen as
long as the power remains on.
• You cannot use the 1-2 Play function and Registrations at the same time. Choosing one always
cancels the other.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To create your own Registration:
1) Set up the panel and functions in the way that you’d like to save them.
2) Press the SAVE REGIST button. Use the R1 – R4 buttons to select the Registration Group in which to
save your setup. Use the F1 – F4 buttons to view the 20 Registration Groups in sets of five.
3) Press one of the 8 REGISTRATION buttons to specify which location you’d like to save your Registration
to.
R1–R5 Selects the Registration Group to save in.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
Press the F1-F4 buttons to display the Registration
Groups on the other pages.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
REGISTRATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S
Press the specific REGISTRATION button where
you’d like to save to.
• The following settings can be stored in a Registration:
Sounds (Solo, Right1, Right2, Left), Split Point, Style and Variation, Fill-in mode, Tempo,
Accompaniment settings, Mixer settings, Chorus settings, Effect settings, Harmony settings,
Voicing, Detune, Resonance, Left Pedal functions, Mic Harmony, and Mic Effect
• You can save your Registrations on a floppy disk and load them into the CP later. (See page 156.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To rename the Registration Group:
1) Press the REGIST GROUPS button.
2) Use the F1, F2, L and R buttons to select the Group to rename.
3) Press the NAME (F6, F7) button.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
Use the F1, F2, L and R buttons to select the Group to rename.
4) In the Registration Group Name screen, use the CURSOR (F2, F3) buttons and the CHARACTER (F4,
F5) buttons to change the name. You can also use the Dial to change the characters.
5) Press the SAVE (F6, F7) button to confirm the name.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the previous menu.
F2, F3 Moves the cursor over the characters in the name.
F4, F5 Selects a character.
F6, F7 Saves the name.
Style Lock
STYLE LOCK
Pressing the STYLE LOCK button keeps the current Style, even if another Registration is selected.
This allows you to change Sounds and settings by the Registration button while keeping the Style
as-is. As long as the STYLE LOCK button is on, changing registrations will not change the style.
However, you can always manually change the style, even if the Style Lock is on.
Press the STYLE LOCK button again to turn it off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Stylist
SONG
STYLIST
With over 900 Sounds and 220 Styles, it can sometimes be difficult to decide the best settings with
which to play a song. Even if you are very familiar with the Concert Performer, you may want a
quick way to change the CP’s setup to play another song. The Song Stylist feature was created to
handle this situation for you. You simply pick the name of the song you want to play and the
Concert Performer sets up everything for you.
The Song Stylist contains a list of 700 popular song titles. In the Song Stylist, there is an appropriate
setup for each of those songs. You may search for your favorite title either alphabetically by song
name, or by category of musical genre. Once you’ve found the song you want to play, simply press
one button and the CP is immediately setup for that song and ready for you to begin.
• The Song Stylist contains no prerecorded music, only the setup to play the chosen song. You
must play the actual music yourself.
To use the Song Stylist:
1) Press the SONG STYLIST button. The Category list appears, showing the different musical genres for
the SONG STYLIST.
2) Use the SEARCH BY CATEGORY buttons (F1, F2) to display the Category choices on the other page.
When you have found the category you want, use the L and R buttons to select it. A list of songs
within that musical category appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L, R buttons to select your desired category.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Shows the other categories.
F3, F4 Shows the song list in alphabetical order.
F6 Searches for a title from a floppy disk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3) Use the PAGE buttons (F1, F2) to display the Song Titles on the other pages in the same category.
4) Use the L and R buttons to select one of the ten songs displayed in the screen. The CP automatically
returns to the Main Screen ready with all of the settings for that song.
5) You may start and play the song in your usual manner. You can operate the CP normally and make
any changes to the Song Stylist setup that you wish.
6) To play another song, press the Songlist (F7) button. To exit, press the SONG STYLIST button again
or press the EXIT button.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L or R buttons to select your desired song.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Searches for a title on the other pages.
F3
F4
F6
F7
Jumps to the Song Stylist Category menu.
Searches for a title listed in alphabetical order.
Searches for a title from a floppy disk.
Selects the song.
Selecting a song from a floppy disk.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Searches for a title on the other page.
F4
F6
F7
Starts the Chain Play.
Searches for a title from the internal presets.
Selects the song.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L1
L2
L3
L4
Highlights the Style.
Adjusts the Tempo.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
R2
R3
R4
Highlights the SOLO Part.
Highlights the RIGHT 1 Part.
Highlights the RIGHT 2 Part.
Changes the split point.
Highlights the LEFT Part.
Changes the split point.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Turns on the Auto Chord Progression (if available).
F3, F4 Turns on the Melody part (if available).
F5, F6 Adjusts the volume level for the sound.
F7
Takes you back to the Song Stylist menu.
• You may use different Sounds, Styles, Tempo and other settings to customize to your taste.
• When choosing a Song Stylist created by you (or someone else) and saved to floppy disk, there
may be a recorded melody and chord track available. The chord track, called the Auto Chord
Progression, will provide you with the chord changes to the song.
You may also find a song title by searching the list alphabetically.
To search the Song Stylist by Song Title:
1) Press the SONG STYLIST button. The Category list appears, showing the different musical genres for
the SONG STYLIST.
2) Press the SEARCH BY NAME (F3, F4) buttons. In the Name Menu, press the L or R buttons to take you
to the first letter of the name of the song. For example, if your song title starts with “G”, press the L4
button.
3) Use the PAGE (F1, F2) to search for the name of your song. When you find the song, press the
corresponding L or R button. The CP automatically returns to the Main Screen ready with all of the
settings for that song.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Harmony
HARMONY
When the Auto-Accompaniment is on, you can use Harmony function. The Harmony function
automatically adds notes to your right hand (melody) part to help you sound more professional.
This function analyzes the notes you play and automatically adds notes from the Accompaniment
chord (shown in the Main Screen when the Accompaniment is on), creating a “harmony” part (even
if you are only playing single notes in the left and right hands).
There are 10 types of Harmony.
Block
Open
Adds three or four notes based on the chord.
Adds three or four notes based on the chord. Harmony notes may extend over
one octave below the lowest right-hand note.
J azz
Adds three or four notes based on the chord.
Rockn’
Adds a note at a fifth (or fourth) interval to the lowest note played in the RIGHT
Part.
Dynamic
Duet
Adds three or four notes based on the chord. Harmony notes are played within
one octave below the lowest note played in the right hand.
Adds a note according to the lowest note played in the right hand and based on
the chord.
Octave
Takes the highest note played in the right hand and doubles it an octave down.
Adds an Octave note and a Duet note.
Octave Duet
Vocal 1
Adds a single note above the top note of the right hand based on the chord.
Vocal 2
Adds three notes based on the chord. The lowest note will always be the root of
the chord.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use Harmony:
1) Press the HARMONY button. The button will be lit to show that it is active. The Harmony symbol will
also appear in the Main Screen.
2) To change the Harmony type, hold down the Harmony button for a moment until the Harmony Select
menu is displayed.
3) Choose the Harmony type using the L and R buttons.
4) Press the EXIT button to leave the Harmony Select menu.
5) To turn off the Harmony, press the HARMONY button again.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L or R buttons to select your desired
Harmony type.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
• The additional notes created by Harmony are added to the RIGHT 1 Part, if that part is on. If the
RIGHT 1 Part is off, the additional notes are added to the RIGHT 2 Part. If both parts are off,
there will be no Harmony even though the HARMONY button is lit. The Harmony notes are
played with the same sound as the part they are added to.
• You can volume mix the Harmony separately in the MIXER screen.
• If the Accompaniment in not on, you will not be able to activate Harmony
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording a Song
The CP has built-in recording capabilities that allow you to record
and play back your performances. Since the CP records your
performances as digital data not audio data you can easily edit your
performances after recording them. There are two ways to use the
CP’s recording feature:
up to 16 independent tracks separately. In addition, with Advanced
Recorder you can edit your recorded data one measure or even
one note at a time. There is also a step recording mode in which
you can enter notes or other MIDI data events one step at a time
for even more accurate control.
Easy Recorder records your playing much like a tape recorder and
is just as easy to use. The CP will record all of your playing as well
as any changes you make to the front panel settings during the
recording.
Song data created on other instruments in the Standard MIDI File
format (SMF) can also be loaded into the CP’s recorder to be played
or edited. The CP’s recorder can read both Type 1 and 0 SMF files.
Please read the following sections carefully to learn more about
the capabilities of the Easy and Advanced recorder.
Advanced Recorder is useful for creating more complex
recordings. Advanced Recorder gives you the ability to record on
Easy Recording
The Easy Recorder will record all of your playing as well as any settings you have made on the front
panel or in the mixer screen at the touch of a button. Simply press the REC button and the CP will
begin recording with the first note you play. You can also record a Style along with your playing if
you like. Before you begin recording its a good idea to select your desired sound(s) and make any
panel settings you would like to record.
To record:
RECORDER
PLAY/STOP
1) Press the REC button. The REC button LED will blink and the LCD screen will show Rec Ready. If you
want to, you can still change sounds or panel settings before proceeding.
RESET
REC
RWD
FWD
2) Start recording in one of the following ways:
A. Play the keys and the CP will automatically start recording with the first note you play.
B. If you are recording with a Style, press the START/STOP button to start the recorder with the Style.
Pressing the INTRO/ENDING button will include an Intro phrase at the beginning of the recording.
C. You can also press the SYNC button to begin recording the Style and your own playing together.
D. Press the PLAY/STOP button to start with a 2-bar countdown to help you get ready.
3) When you are finished recording, press the PLAY/STOP button.
You may resume recording from the point where you stopped by repeating these steps from step 2.
P. 42
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
You can make changes to the panel settings before
and during recording using the L and R buttons.
The current bar number is displayed.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Takes you to the Mixer menu.
Deletes the recorded song data
F3-F7 Changes the part status.
• You may resume recording from the bar where you stopped by repeating these steps. You can
also change sounds, tempo, and make other changes to the panel settings before you continue
recording.
• To Re-record or make other changes to a previously recorded section of a song, please read the
section titled “Re-recording or adding another Part” on page 44.
RECORDER
PLAY/STOP
To play back the recorded song:
RESET
REC
RWD
FWD
1) Press the RESET button in the RECORDER section of the front panel to return to the first bar of the
song.
2) Press the PLAY/STOP button to play back the song.
3) Press the PLAY/STOP button again to stop at any time.
4) Pressing the PLAY/STOP button again resumes the playback from the bar where you stopped.
5) Use the RWD or FWD buttons to rewind or fast-forward through the recording.
Recording a Song
P. 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part Status
The playback and record status for the RIGHT/ LEFT Parts and the Style are displayed at the bottom
of the LCD screen. Whether you are in the process of recording or playing back your song it is
helpful to know the status for each of these Parts.
The LCD screen will show the following Part status messages at the bottom of the screen:
REC
This Part is ready to be recorded. This message is only displayed after the REC button has
been pressed.
PLAY This Part has been recorded and will be heard both on playback and while recording.
MUTE This Part has been recorded but will be silent both on playback and while recording.
– – –
This part has not been recorded.
After you have recorded a song you can change the status for a Part by pressing the appropriate
button, F3-7 below the LCD screen. Pressing the F buttons during playback will select PLAY or
MUTE. REC can only be selected after you press the REC button but before you begin recording.
During recording you can however set any Part to PLAY or MUTE by pressing the appropriate F
button.
You can record all RIGHT/LEFT Parts as well as the Style simultaneously or only certain Parts as
you choose. When you first record a song all Parts and the Style will be automatically set to REC
but only the active Parts and the Style will be recorded. When you are finished recording the status
for any active Parts and the Style will automatically change from REC to PLAY. After recording, the
status for any RIGHT/LEFT Parts that were not active during recording will be automatically changed
to - - - to show they have not been recorded yet.
When you press the PLAY/STOP button to listen to your song any Parts set to PLAY status will be
heard.
Re-recording or adding another Part
After you have recorded a song you can Re-record a Part or add (overdub) other Parts if you like
with the following procedure. Re-recording a Part completely erases the previous performance for
that Part automatically.
To Re-record or add a Part:
1) Make sure the Part(s) you wish to Re-record are active, then select any sounds or change panel
settings as desired.
P. 44
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) Press the REC button.
3) Press the appropriate F button(s) below the LCD screen to set the desired Part(s) to REC.
4) Begin recording by following step 2 in the “ To Record” section on page 42.
Remember Re-Recording a Part completely erases the previously recorded performance for that
Part. You can Re-record or add any of the RIGHT/LEFT Parts as many times as you like but you can
only have one performance/sound for each RIGHT/LEFT Part.
Saving the song
Once you finish recording a song you should save it to disk before you turn the power OFF. Once
the power is turned OFF your song data will be lost.
See the section titled “Saving Data to a Floppy Disk” on page 157.
• If you press the EXIT button to get out of the Easy Recorder, the CP will automatically prompt
you to save your work.
Erasing the song
Whenever a Part is selected for recording, the new performance is written right over any existing
one that may be there for that Part. In this sense, the Easy Recorder is just like a tape machine. A
new song will simply erase the old song during the recording process.
However, if you wish to simply erase all the Parts and the Style in a song at once you can use the
Delete function.
To delete a song:
1) Press the DELETE button (F2) while the Recorder is not recording or currently ready to record. The
CP will ask if you are sure.
2) Use either the YES (F7) button to proceed or NO (F1) to cancel.
Recording a Song
P. 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Cancels erasing the song.
Proceeds with erasing the song.
• DELETE erases all of the performance data for all Parts and the Style in the song. The panel
setup, such as Style, Tempo, and Sound settings are not erased by the DELETE function.
P. 46
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Recording
The Advanced Recorder is a full featured sixteen track MIDI recorder that includes many of the
same professional features found on dedicated MIDI sequencing (recording) devices. In addition
to sixteen MIDI tracks the CP Advanced recorder provides a separate Style, chord, and tempo track
for even more flexibility.
ADVANCED
RECORDER
Even though you can create recordings of great musical complexity using the Advanced recorder
you will find that it is still very straightforward and easy to use.
Using the Advanced Recorder allows you much greater control over the recording and compositional
process than that offered by the Easy Recorder. However, songs created using the Easy Recorder
can also be edited using the Advanced Recorder by simply pressing the ADVANCED RECORDER
button.
To go to the Advanced Recorder Menu:
Press the ADVANCED RECORDER button. The recording options will be displayed on the screen.
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
Edit loop settings for the song.
Edit the general settings for the song.
Edit the song by bars.
L1
Change the Reverb, Effect, Panning, Volume level
and Chorus for each of the 16 tracks.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
L5
Prepares the track for real-time recording.
Re-record specific measures within your song.
Record by entering data note by note.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Edit the song by MIDI events.
Create your own new user Style.
Select the sound to be assigned to each of the
16 tracks, and change the track's recording and
play back status.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Converts recorded Style data into MIDI note data that can then
be edited in the Advanced Recorder. Style Paste will only be
displayed if the current song was recorded using a Style.
Recording a Song
P. 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Real-time Recording
With Real-time record, the CP records your performance as you are playing it, in real-time. You can
select any of the sixteen instrument tracks or the Style and tempo tracks to record, but you can
only record on one track at a time. Since the Advanced Recorder only records on one track at a
time, only the RIGHT 1 Part is active in the Advanced Recorder. Any other active Parts are
automatically turned OFF when the ADVANCED RECORDER button is pressed. In addition to
selecting the desired track to record, the Real-time recording screen provides many other useful
Real-time recording functions.
To use Real-time recording:
1) From the Advanced Recorder menu, press the L2 button to select “Real Time REC”, or simply press
the REC button. The REC button LED will blink and the LCD screen will display the “Real Time REC”
screen.
2) Use the F, L and R buttons to select a function to edit. Use the Dial to change the values.
3) If necessary, you can go to the Mixer and Track Settings screens by pressing the appropriate F
buttons.
L1
L2
Selects the track on which you want to record.
There are 16 Instrument tracks, 1 Tempo track,
and 1 Style track.
R1
R2
R3
Changes the time signature.
Changes the tempo.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Selects the sound or Style that you want to
record with.
Selects the recording mode. REPLACE
erases the previous data and records the
new data in its place. OVERDUB mixes the
new data with the previous data so that both
are heard together. Repeatedly pressing the
R3 button switches between the REPLACE
and OVERDUB.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L3
L4
Shows the current bar and beat number.
Selects the starting bar for the Loop feature. This
function is a available only when Loop is turned
ON.
L 5
R 5
R4
Selects the ending bar for the Loop feature.
This function is available only when Loop
is turned on.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Cancels the real-time recording setup and returns you to the Advanced
Recorder menu.
Takes you to the Mixer menu.
F4, F5 Takes you to the Track Settings menu.
F6 Turns the Loop feature on/off
P. 48
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) Start recording by pressing the PLAY/STOP button while the REC button LED is blinking. There is an
automatic two bar count in before the CP begins recording. If you are recording on the Style track you
must press the START/STOP or INTRO buttons instead of the PLAY/STOP button. When recording a
Style there is no two bar count in, recording begins immediately.
You can cancel recording at anytime by pressing the REC button again or by pressing the F1 button to
return to the Advanced Recorder menu.
• When you select a Style to record the default tempo for that Style is ignored. The Style will use
the current tempo setting for the song instead. You can set the desired tempo on the Real-time
record screen before recording or change the tempo after you have recorded in Song Edit or on
the tempo track in Event Edit.
• When you are recording on the Style track only the Style will be recorded. The style track will
record any chords (to the chord track) you play but the actual notes you are playing will not be
recorded.
• When the recording is done, the Mixer screen will automatically be displayed.
To play back the recorded song:
1) Press the RESET button in the RECORDER section of the front panel to return to the first bar of the
song.
2) Press the PLAY/STOP button to play back the song.
3) Press the PLAY/STOP button again to stop at any time.
4) Pressing the PLAY/STOP button again resumes the playback from the bar where you stopped.
5) Use the RWD or FWD buttons to rewind or fast-forward through the recording.
Mixer
On the Mixer screen, you can change the following settings for each of the 16 tracks: Reverb level,
Chorus level, Effect on/off, Panning, Track mute, Volume level.
To use the Mixer:
1) Use the TRACK buttons (F2, F3) to select which of the 16 tracks you wish to make changes to.
2) Use the L1 and L5 buttons to choose the track setting that you want to change.
3) Use the Dial to change the value.
Recording a Song
P. 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) At this point, you can start recording or go to another menu to continue setting up.
• You can make changes on the Mixer screen at any time except while the CP is busy recording.
The Mixer screen is accessible from the Advanced Recorder menu, Track Settings screen and
Real-time Rec screen.
• You can save any changes you have made to the settings on the Mixer screen at any bar or beat
in your song. Simply play back the song or press the FWD/RWD buttons until you reach the
exact bar and beat where you want to make changes to the Mixer settings and stop the song.
Make any changes on the Mixer screen, then press the SAVE button (F7). You can do this as
many times and in as many places within your song as you wish.
Note
“Saving” here only means any changes you made on the Mixer screen were saved as part of the
song. Once you finish recording a song or after you make any important changes you should save
it to disk before you turn the power OFF. Once the power is turned OFF your song data and any
changes you have made will be lost.
See the section titled “Saving Data to a Floppy Disk” on page 157.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1, L5 Used to select the track setting you want to
change. Use the Dial to change the value.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Returns you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
F2, F3 Selects the track that you wish to edit.
F4, F5 Takes you to the Track Settings menu.
F6
F7
Turns Loop ON/OFF.
Saves the Mixer settings as part of the song.
P. 50
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track Settings
The Track Settings screen shows you the Play, Record, and Mute status for each track. In addition
it shows you what sound is assigned for the sixteen instrument tracks. You can change the track
status or select a different sound for each track.
The Track Status screen will show the following Status messages.
Rec
This track is ready to be recorded.
Play
MIDI Rec
This track has been recorded and will be heard both on playback and while recording.
MIDI Rec enables the CP to record incoming MIDI data from an external MIDI
instrument connected to the MIDI jacks. You can set more than one track to MIDI
Rec, enabling the CP to record on several tracks simultaneously over MIDI.
This track has been recorded but will be silent both on playback and while recording.
This track has not been recorded.
Mute
Empty
After you have recorded a song you can change the status for a track by pressing the STATUS
button (F3) below the LCD screen. Pressing the STATUS button during playback will select Play or
Mute. Pressing the STATUS button after entering Real-time record but before recording begins, will
select Play, MIDI Rec, or Mute. Rec can only be selected from the Real-time Record screen. The
Track settings screen cannot be accessed during recording.
To use the Track Settings screen:
1) Press the TRACK SETTINGS button (L5) on the Advanced Recorder menu.
2) Press the L3 and L4 buttons to select the track that you wish to edit. If you wish to select tracks 10-
16, the Style, or Tempo tracks, press the L5 button to jump to these tracks. Press the L2 button to
return to tracks 1-9.
3) Press the STATUS button (F3) to change the status to PLAY, MUTE or MIDI REC.
4) If you wish to change the sound assigned to the track, press the SOUND buttons (F5, F6). You can
also select sounds by pressing any of the SOUND buttons.
5) When you are finished, press the MENU button (F1) to return to the Advanced Recorder menu or
press the MIXER button (F2) to go to the Mixer menu.
Recording a Song
P. 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
Changes the tempo. Use the Dial to change
the value.
L2
Jumps to tracks 1-9.
L3, L4 Selects the tracks one at a time.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
L5
Jumps to tracks 10-16, Tempo, and Style.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F3
Returns you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Takes you to the Mixer.
Changes the track’s status.
F5, F6 Selects a different sound for the track.
F7 Saves the Track settings as part of the song.
• As discussed in the above section, MIDI Rec enables the CP to record incoming MIDI data from
an external MIDI instrument connected to the MIDI jacks. You can set more than one track to
MIDI REC, enabling the CP to record on several tracks simultaneously over MIDI. Each MIDI
Rec track will record on the incoming MIDI channel that corresponds to its track number. Track
1 records MIDI channel 1 and so on.
Loop Settings
The Loop function lets you specify certain bars or your entire song to repeat over and over. Loop is
a global function and all tracks will be looped equally. You cannot have different loop settings for
each track.
To set the Loop:
1) Go to the Loop Settings screen by pressing the R1 button in the Advanced Recorder menu.
2) Use the L2–L4 buttons to select the different settings, then use the Dial to change the values.
3) Press the L2 button to turn the Loop ON/OFF.
4) Press the L3 button to specify the bar where you want the Loop to start.
P. 52
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) Press the L4 button to specify the bar where you want the Loop to end.
6) Press the MENU button (F1) to return to the Advanced Recorder menu when you are finished.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Turns the Loop ON/OFF.
Specifies the starting bar.
Specifies the ending bar.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you back to the Advanced Recorder menu.
• You can turn looping on and off in the Mixer menu. However, you still have to set the Start and
End Bar from the Loop Settings menu.
• You can set up looping for recording in the Real-time REC menu as well. In the Real-time REC
menu, when you turn on the looping, the Start Bar and End Bar information will be automatically
copied from the Loop Settings menu.
Style Paste
When you record a Style as part of your song, the Style data is automatically recorded on the Style
track. This data is unique to the CP, and cannot be used with any other musical instruments.
Additionally the instrument tracks that are part of the Style cannot be edited individually.
Style Paste converts any Style data recorded on the Style track into MIDI note and event data and
places it on separate tracks (Trks 9-16). Once the Style data is converted into actual note data, you
can view and edit the individual Style tracks as if you had recorded the data yourself. Also your
song including the Style can now be played back by any other MIDI instrument that reads Standard
MIDI File (SMF) format song data.
Recording a Song
P. 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Before you use Style Paste, you need to make sure Tracks 9-16 are empty or don’t contain important
data. When the Style is pasted, the data from the Style track will be pasted into these tracks and
will replace any existing data.
To use Style Paste:
1) Press the STYLE PASTE button (F1) while you are in the Advanced Recorder menu. The LCD screen
will prompt you for confirmation.
2) If you would like to proceed, press the YES button (F7), or press the NO button (F1) to cancel.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Cancels the Style Paste.
Proceeds with Style Paste.
Punch-In Recording
Punching In means being able to automatically start recording right in the middle of a track that is
playing back, continue recording new data on that track for a specified number of measures, and
then automatically stop recording at a specific measure and hear the rest of the track play to the
end. This tool is very valuable if you wish to record over some misplayed notes in the middle of a
track, but would like to preserve the music in the measures leading up to, and following, the trouble
spot.
P. 54
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use Punch-in recording:
1) Select Punch In/Out in the Advanced Recorder menu.
2) Use the L and R buttons to select the options and change their values using the Dial. Select AUTO
with the R5 button to have the CP automatically handle the punching in/out while you play.
3) Press the REHEARSAL button (F4, F5) to listen to the song for rehearsal. If you need to adjust mixing
or if you would like to loop the song, use the MIXER (F2) or LOOP ON/OFF (F6) button.
4) When you are ready to record, press the REC button and then the PLAY button. The music will start
immediately from the Start Bar that you have chosen. Once the song reaches the Punch In Bar, any
notes that you play on the keyboard will be recorded.
Recording will stop when the song reaches the Punch-Out Bar, but the CP will keep playing back the
song to the end unless you press the STOP button.
You can repeat the punch-in/out section by turning the looping on with the F6 button.
5) Listen to what you have recorded and re-record if necessary.
R1
R2
R3
Changes the time signature.
Changes the tempo.
L1
Selects the track to Punch in on.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Selects the recording mode. REPLACE
erases the previous data and records the
new data in its place. OVERDUB mixes the
new data with the previous data so that both
are heard together. Repeatedly pressing the
R3 button switches between the REPLACE
and OVERDUB.
L3
L4
L5
Selects the measure in the song from where you
want the CP to start playing.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the measure where the CP will punch-in
and start recording.
L 5
R 5
Selects the measure where the CP will punch-
out and stop recording.
R5
Selects the Punch-in method, Auto or Pedal.
Repeatedly pressing the R5 button switches
between the Auto and Pedal.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Takes you to the Mixer Settings menu.
F4, F5 Plays the song for rehearsal.
F6 Turns Loop on/off.
Recording a Song
P. 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If you set the CP to Punch-In at the very first measure of the song, the metronome will
automatically play a two-measure intro to assist you with the timing. These “ticks” will not be
recorded as part of the track.
Punch-In recording using the pedal
Instead of specifically setting an automatic Punch-In and Punch-Out Bar, you can use the center
pedal to manually Punch In and Out.
• You can punch in and out with pedal one time for each pass over the track that you make.
To use the pedal to Punch-In/Out:
1) Use the R5 button to select Pedal in the Punch In/Out menu.
2) Use the L and R buttons to set up other recording options.
3) Press the REC button to start. The song will start playing.
4) When the song reaches the bar where you wish to punch in, press the center pedal and play the
keyboard.
5) When you reach the bar where you wish to punch out, press the pedal again to stop recording. Notice
that the song keeps playing to the end (it’s just no longer recording) or until you press STOP.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
R2
R3
Changes the time signature.
Changes the tempo.
L1
L3
Selects the track to Punch in.
Selects the recording mode. REPLACE
erases the previous data and records the new
data in its place. OVERDUB mixes the new
data with the previous data so that both are
heard together. Repeatedly pressing the R3
button switches between the REPLACE and
OVERDUB.
Selects the measure in the song from where you
want the CP to start playing.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
R5
Selects Auto or Pedal as the Punch-In
method. Repeatedly pressing the R5 button
switches between the Auto and Pedal.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Takes you to the Mixer Settings menu.
F4, F5 Plays the song for reharsal.
F6 Turns Loop on/off.
P. 56
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Recording
Step Recording is a method of recording a song by manually entering notes one after another as
data, instead of playing the keyboard in real-time. This method may be useful when trying to create
a phrase with a precise rhythm, or when recording a phrase that is beyond your playing skill level.
To set up Step recording:
1) In the Advanced Recorder menu select Step Rec (L4). The Step Record menu will be displayed.
2) Use the L and R buttons and the Dial to set up recording options.
3) Press the START button (F7). You will be presented with the data entry screen.
R1
R3
Changes the time signature.
L1
L2
L3
Selects the recording track.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Selects which sound is assigned to the track.
Selects recording mode. REPLACE erases
the previous data and records the new data
in its place. OVERDUB mixes the new data
with the previous data so that both are
heard together. Repeatedly pressing the R3
button switches between the REPLACE and
OVERDUB.
Selects which measure you’d like to start
recording at.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Cancels Step recording and takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Proceeds to the data entry screen of the Step Record menu.
To use the Step Recorder:
1) Use the F1–F3 buttons to select a setting (Note value, Note length, Velocity) and use the Dial to
change its value. The value will be displayed above the buttons at the bottom of the screen.
Velocity value can be entered by actually hitting a key on the keyboard. To enable this, select “Key”
for the Velocity value instead of a number.
Recording a Song
P. 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) To enter a note event, play the note using the keyboard. The note data will be displayed on the
screen. Continue entering as many notes as you wish; notice how previously entered notes continue
to be displayed as a list, screen room permitting. The graphic navigator near the bottom of the
screen gives you feedback as to what bar you are in.
3) If you enter a wrong note and wish to delete it, press the L2 button. When you are using the REPLACE
mode for recording, every time you press L2 the list of your entered notes on the screen scrolls back
one event, and that event is erased immediately. Therefore, if you scroll back to the first beat of bar
5 of a 10-bar list of notes, everything from bar 5 on will be erased. In OVERDUB mode, however, you
can delete only the most recently added note, and scrolling back over the list using L2 will not
automatically erase events. When using OVERDUB, you need to press the Delete button (R1) to
erase the event.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
Deletes the last note entered in OVERDUB
mode.
L2, L3 Moves the cursor up and down the list of entered
notes in OVERDUB mode.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Selects the note value.
Adjusts the note length.
Selects the velocity value. Values are from 1–127 or Key.
Enters Tied note values.
Enters a rest.
Takes you to the beginning of the next measure.
Stops recording.
P. 58
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) If you would like to enter a rest, press the REST button (F5). This moves the cursor to the next beat
without entering any data. The rest value is same as the note value selected for the F1 button.
If you would like to enter a rest for the remainder of the measure, press the NEXT BAR button (F6).
This will bring the cursor to the top of the next measure.
5) When you like to tie notes, press the TIE button (F4) while holding down the key. This doubles the
length of the note. If you press the TIE button twice while holding down the key, the length of the note
is tripled.
6) In OVERDUB mode, if you go back to certain point to enter a note, use the L2 and L3 buttons to move
the cursor up and down to get to the event time where you want to insert the new data.
7) Press the STOP (F7) button or the PLAY/STOP button to stop recording.
• Transpose and Octave Shift can be in effect as you are entering notes. The transposed pitches
are the note values that are recorded.
• The navigator graphic represents the current bar that you are recording. The partitions represent
each beat, and thus the number of partitions matches the time signature of the music. For example,
there would be 4 partitions if the time signature is 4/4, and 6 partitions if it is 6/8. Each partition
consists of a number of spaces where dots (• ) will be displayed to mark time. Each space
represents 24 clock pulses. Therefore the number of displayed spaces per partition represents
the duration of the beat.
Note Rest
Clock value
384
192
96
î
w
î
Î
h
q
Î
q£
e
e£
x
x£
r
r£
( £ )
64
48
32
24
ä
For example, if you choose the 4/4 time signature in the Step Recording settings, the navigator
should look as illustrated below.
ä
( £ )
(
£ )
16
Measure
¨
12
8
¨
4 partitions: 4 beat rhythm
4 dot spaces: 4 x 24 = 96 clock pulses = a quarter note rhythm
( £ )
BAR
3
• • • •
––––––––––––––––
Beat
The dots do not represent the duration of the notes. They just tell you where they are.
For a further explanation of the CP’s Clock, and what is meant by “clock pulses” see the Clock
Move description in the Bar Edit section.
Recording a Song
P. 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Edit
Song Edit lets you name, transpose, and change initial tempo settings for your song.
To edit the song:
1) Select Song Edit from the Advanced Recorder menu. The Song Edit screen is displayed.
2) Use the L and R buttons to select the setting that you wish to change, then use the Dial to change the
value.
3) To name to the song, use the F2 and F3 buttons to move the cursor over the characters in the name,
then use the Dial to select characters.
4) Press the L3 button to set the transpose amount. You can transpose your song +/- 24 in half step
increments.
5) Press L4 to change the initial tempo setting of the song.
6) When you are finished, press the MENU button (F1) to return to the Advanced Recorder menu.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Names the song.
Adjusts transposition.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Sets the initial tempo of the song.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
F2, F3 Moves the cursor over the characters when naming the song.
P. 60
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bar Editing
Bar Edit contains many useful editing functions. You can edit your song one bar or any number of
bars at a time.
To use Bar Edit:
1) In the Advanced Recorder menu select Bar Edit (R3). The Bar Edit screen will be displayed.
2) Use the L and R buttons to select the desired editing function. The editing screen for that function
will be displayed.
Use the L and R buttons to select the desired edit
function.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Recording a Song
P. 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quantize
Quantize automatically shifts the timing of a note. This can be used to correct imperfect timing in a
performance by shifting notes that were played either too early or too late so they will fall exactly
on the correct beat. For example, you can accurately align any out of time notes to the nearest 8th-
or 16th-note beat depending on the type of song you are quantizing. Sometimes quantizing all of
your notes to exactly the same beat can make your playing sound too stiff. The Advanced Recorder
quantize function allows you to set a quantize “Range” so only the notes that were very early or late
are quantized. Notes that were almost perfect are not quantized thus keeping more of the original
feeling in your music.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
Selects the track that you wish to quantize.
R2
Selects the note Resolution for quantization.
Use the Dial to change the value.
L2, L3 Selects the bar range that you want to quantize.
Use the Dial to set the bar numbers.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
R3, R4 Sets the Low and High Range for
quantization. Use the Dial to change the
value.
L4
L5
Selects the lowest note that you want to quantize.
Use the Dial to change the note value.
L 5
R 5
Selects the highest note that you want to
quantize. Use the Dial to change the note value.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Returns you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the quantization which was just applied. This option
is not always available.
F7
Applies the quantization to your recording.
• Resolution determines the timing value the quantize function will use to shift the notes you want
to quantize. For example, setting a quarter note resolution will shift all of the quantized notes to
the nearest quarter beat. Setting an eighth note resolution will shift all of the quantized notes to
the nearest eighth beat and so on. In the Advanced Recorder, quantize values are expressed in
note values and as a number that indicates how many clock beats each note value contains. The
Advanced Recorder divides each beat in a bar into 96 smaller clock beats. A Quarter note is 96
clock beats, an eighth note is 48 clock beats, and a sixteenth note is 24 clock beats and so on.
The quantize resolution range is from quarter notes (96 clocks), to 64th note triplets (4 clocks).
P. 62
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Range sets up timing “borders” around the Resolution value you specify. Notes within these
borders will not be quantized and notes outside the borders will be moved to the nearest beat
specified by the resolution value (Quarter note, Eighth note, etc.). The negative value represents
the placement of the “border” before the beat, and the positive value represents the placement
the “border” after the beat. Together, these two “borders” form a timing “range” around the
specified beat.
Resolution
24
Beat
12
Beat
12
Selecting zero Range results in no
“range”, and all notes are shifted
to the precise beat.
Range
0, 0
Ï
«
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
»
Ï
Ï
«
Ï
»
Ï
Ï
«
«
Resolution
24
Beat
12
Beat
12
The notes that fall beyond the
Range are moved to the closest
“border” of the Range.
Range
-3, 3
Ï
«
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
»
Ï
Resolution
48
Beat
24
Beat
24
The notes that fall inside the Range
are not shifted at all.
Range
2, 10
Ï
«
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
»
Ï
By experimenting with Resolution and Range settings, you can correct the timing of the notes in your
recording while still allowing for a natural, human feel.
Recording a Song
P. 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copy
The Copy function allows you to copy a section or all of the data on a track to another location.
The destination may be on the same track, or it can be on another track.
• The destination of the copied data must either be:
1) A location that already has data in it.
2) The first blank bar after the end of a track (Bar 1 if the destination track is empty).
For example, if a track only has 10 bars in it, you cannot copy data onto bar 20. You can, however,
copy data to bars 1 through 11.
• Copied data replaces any current data that may be at the destination.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Selects the track to be copied. Use the Dial to
select the track numbers 1-16, Tempo, or Chord.
R2
R3
Selects the destination track. Use the Dial
to select the track number 1-16, Tempo, or
Chord.
Selects the bar where the data that you are
copying starts. Use the Dial to change the bar
number.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the bar in the destination track where
the copied data will be placed.
L4
Selects the bar where the data that you are
copying ends. Use the Dial to change the bar
number.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F7
Returns you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the copying. This option is not always available.
Proceed with copying.
P. 64
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delete
Delete completely erases and removes the bars that you specify.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Selects the track to be deleted. Use the Dial to
choose 1-16, Tempo, Chord or All.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the first bar that has the data you want
to delete. Use the Dial to change bars.
Selects the last bar that contains the data that
you want to delete. Use the Dial to change bars.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F7
Returns you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the deletion. This option is not always available.
Proceed with the deletion.
Recording a Song
P. 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert
The Insert function duplicates data from specified bars and copies it to a certain location. However,
the current data at the destination is not erased, but instead is pushed back to make room for the
copied data.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R2
R3
Selects the destination track where you want
this data inserted. Choose from 1-16,
Tempo, Chord or All.
L2
Selects the track that contains the data you wish
to duplicate. Choose from 1-16, Tempo, Chord
or All.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the bar in the destination track where
you want this data inserted.
L3
L4
Selects the first bar that has the data you want
to duplicate.
Selects the last bar that has the data you want to
duplicate.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the Insert. This option is not always available.
F3, F4 Takes you to the Insert Bar menu.
F7 Proceeds with the Insert.
• If you just wish to insert empty bars into a track, select INSERT BAR (F3 or F4), and a sub-menu
will be displayed. You can insert empty bars into a track between bars that have data, or at the
first blank bar at the end of the track.
P. 66
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Selects the number of empty bars you wish to
insert. Use the Dial to change the value.
R2
R3
Selects the track where the empty bars are
going to be inserted. Choose 1-16, Tempo,
Chord or All.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the time signature for the bars that are
going to be inserted. Use the Dial to change the
value.
Selects the location in the destination track
where you want the empty bars inserted.
Use the Dial to choose the location.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F7
Takes you to the previous menu.
Undoes the Insert. This option is not always available.
Proceeds with the Insert.
Recording a Song
P. 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erase
Erases data in the bars that you specify, and leaves them as empty bars.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Selects the track that has the bars you want to
erase. Choose 1-16, Tempo or Chord.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the first bar to be erased. Use the Dial to
change the bar.
Selects the last bar to be erased. Use the Dial to
change the bar.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F7
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the Erase. This option is not always available.
Proceeds with the Erase.
P. 68
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Merge
Merge combines data from two tracks. You can make complex musical phrases using several tracks,
then combine them together on one track. Remember that there can only be one instrument sound
assigned to each track, so the resulting merged track will play all the combined data using one
instrument sound. Merge can be useful for making rhythm patterns by first recording different
drum/ percussion parts using the same drum kit on several tracks for easy editing of each instrument,
or recording the right and left hand parts of a piano piece and combining them later on one track to
free up extra tracks for more recording.
• Merge does not automatically erase the track from where you copied the data.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
Selects the track from where you want to copy
data. Choose 1-16.
R2
Select the track where you want this data
merged to. Choose 1-16.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F7
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the Merge. This option is not always available.
Proceed with the Merge.
Recording a Song
P. 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Time Modify
Gate time refers to the length of a note as a percentage. Whatever the length of a note is when it is
first recorded, this value is considered as its Gate time of 100%. By editing the length of the note,
you can shorten it to 10% or lengthen it to 300% of the original value.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Selects the track in which you want to modify
Gate times. Use the Dial to choose the track.
R2
Adjusts the Gate time in 10% increments.
Use the Dial to select a value from 10%-
300%.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the first bar of the data that you want to
modify Gate times for. Use the Dial to change
bars.
L4
Selects the last bar of the data that you want to
modify Gate times for. Use the Dial to change
bars.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the Gate time adjustment. This option is not always
available.
F7
Proceeds with applying the Gate time adjustment.
P. 70
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Velocity Modify
Velocity refers to how hard a key is struck, which translates into the dynamics of how loud the
produced sound is.
A note’s Velocity is a numerical value from 1-127. When editing the note Velocities in your recording,
you can change them within a +/-100 range of their original values.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Selects the track in which you want to adjust
Velocity.
R2
Adjusts Velocity from -100 to +100 of their
current values.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the bar where the data you want to adjust
starts.
Selects the bar where the data you want to adjust
ends.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the Velocity adjustment. This option is not always
available.
F7
Proceeds with adjusting the Velocity values.
Recording a Song
P. 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock Move
In the Resolution section of this manual we learned that the CP Advanced recorder divides each
beat in a bar into 96 clock beats, also expressed as a quarter note. Therefore there are 48 clocks per
eighth note, and 24 clocks per sixteenth note and so on. This relationship holds true regardless of
the song’s tempo.
On the CP, you can shift the timing of all notes in a track by shifting the entire track ahead (negative
values) or behind (positive values) the beat by a certain clock value. Clock move is useful for
adjusting the overall timing of a track. For example, if a certain sound you recorded responds
slowly and sounds behind the beat, you could shift the timing of the notes ahead of the beat to
compensate for the sounds slow response and make its timing feel more natural.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
Selects the track that you wish to move. Choose
from 1-16.
R2
Sets how many clocks you wish to move the
track. Choose from –999 to +999.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F7
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the clock move. This option is not always available.
Proceeds with applying the clock move.
P. 72
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transpose
This will transpose the notes within a specified bar(s) up or down in half-step increments.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Selects the track that has the notes you want to
transpose. Choose from 1-16.
R2
Adjusts transposition amount in half-step
increments from -24 to 24.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the bar where the notes you want to
transpose start.
Selects the bar where the notes you want to
transpose end.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F7
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Undoes the transposition. This option is not always available.
Proceeds with applying the transposition.
Recording a Song
P. 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Edit
Event Edit enables you to examine and edit your performance note by note.
To use Event Edit:
1) Select Event Edit in the Advanced Recorder menu. The Event Edit screen will be displayed.
2) Choose the track that you want to edit using the TRACK buttons (F3, F4). Note that Style, Chord, and
Tempo track can be edited as well.
3) Use the L buttons to scroll up or down the event list until you find the specific event that you want to
edit. You can also use the Dial to scroll through the event list. You will hear the individual events
being played as you scroll over them.
4) Use the CURSOR buttons (F5, F6) buttons to determine how you want to scroll through the event list.
Selecting Bar scrolls through the event list bar by bar, selecting Beat scrolls through the event list
beat by beat and so on. The selection will become highlighted.
R1
R2
R3
Removes the selected event.
Creates a new event.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
L5
Moves the cursor to the previous bar.
Moves the cursor up the event list.
Moves the cursor down the event list.
Moves the cursor to the next bar.
Modifies the existing event.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F3, F4 Selects the track to work with.
F5, F6 Moves the cursor across the columns in the event list.
F7 Starts playing the Track.
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder menu.
P. 74
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) Select the function that you would like to apply to this event. You can select DELETE (R1) to remove
the event, INSERT (R2) to create a new event at any specified location, or REPLACE (R3) to change
the existing event. Enter new values in the pop up Entry Box when you select INSERT or REPLACE.
When Inserting or Replacing an event, use the CURSOR buttons to select the specific part of the
event you want to edit. Use the Dial to change the value.
6) Press the EXEC (F7) button to proceed, or press CANCEL (F2). The CP will prompt you for confirmation.
7) Use the MENU button (F1) to return to the Advanced Recorder menu when you are done editing.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
FI
F2
Takes you to the Advanced Recorder Menu.
Cancel the edit.
F5, F6 Moves the cursor across the columns in the event list.
Recording a Song
P. 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Your Own Styles
The Concert Performer contains 220 built-in Styles covering a wide
variety of musical genres. There are two powerful features that
allow you to edit any of these Styles to better suit your musical
tastes, or even create your own Style entirely from scratch! These
are the Conductor and the Style Maker.
The CP can store up to 20 User Styles on board at one time.
However since you can also save your original Styles onto a floppy
disk, your library of Styles is virtually unlimited.
Thanks to the Style Convert Software developed by EMC Software,
you can also convert style data from many other manufacturers
for use on the CP. That way you can take advantage of the hundreds
of Style disks that are available on the market!
The Conductor allows you to edit the Style data and personalize it
to your taste. The Conductor offers two ways to edit: Easy Edit
and Advanced Edit.
The Style Maker allows you to create Styles of your own.
There are three ways of using this feature: Make a New Style, Edit
an Existing Style, and Phrase Combination.
Conductor
The Conductor is used to edit Preset or User Style data.
There are two editing methods offered by the Conductor.
Easy Style Edit This is an easy way to edit the Style data. The CP built-in styles are comprised
three different types, Full, Intimate, and Solo Piano Styles. A Full Style
consists of six instrument tracks called Sections. These are the Drums,
Bass, and four Accompaniment tracks. The Intimate Styles have four
Sections, Drum, Bass, And Two Accompaniment tracks. The Solo piano
Styles have two Accompaniment Tracks (Right and Left hand) and no Drum
or Bass tracks.
When you play a Style, each of these sections plays a musical Phrase
composed for that type of instrument. Each section can play one of four
different musical phrases, one for each of the four variations within a Style.
Easy Edit lets you assign which of these four Phrases will be played by each
section for each of the four variations within the style. This means you can
mix and match the different phrases for each section to create your own
unique arrangements. Once you are satisfied with your edits, you can save
your Easy Style edits to the PRESET STYLE.
P. 76
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Style Edit This allows you to edit the finer details within a Style. You have control
over each Section’s Sound Assignment, volume level, panning, chorus, and
reverb settings. Once you are satisfied with your edits, you can save your
Advanced Style edits to the USER CONDUCTOR.
To use Easy Edit:
CONDUCTOR
1) Select the Style and the Variation (1–4) that you would like to edit.
2) Press the EDIT button. The LCD screen will display the Easy Style Edit screen.
3) Use the F2–F7 buttons to select a Section to edit.
EDIT
RESET
USER
4) Use the L buttons to select the desired Phrase (1-4) for each Section. You can edit while the Style is
running to hear your changes.
5) To mute a Section, press the corresponding F button. Pressing the F button again will un-mute the
section.
6) If you would like to save your edits, press the SAVE TO PRESET (R1) button. The saved contents will
be written to the PRESET STYLE. If you don't save your edits, they will be lost when you turn the
power OFF.
7) Press the MORE (F1) button to go to the Advanced Style Edit screen.
8) Press the EXIT button to leave the Easy Style Edit screen.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
Saves the changes to the Preset Style.
L2–L5 Selects a Phrase for the Section.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Go to Advanced Edit section.
F2–F7 Selects which Section is being changed. Pressing again will
mute the Section.
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Pressing the SAVE button will save all Styles at one time. You cannot save individually.
• For Intimate Styles the ACC 3/4 Sections are not used and cannot be edited.
• For Solo Piano Styles the Drum, Bass, and ACC 3/4 Sections are not used and cannot be edited.
Resetting the Style
The CP always remembers the original Preset Style settings. If you wish to restore those factory
settings before saving your edits, simply press the RESET button in the Conductor.
• If you would like to revert all Styles back to their original factory settings, after you have pressed
the SAVE button, use reset Conductor on the Soft Reset screen. See the section titled “Soft
Reset” on page 144.
Note:
Easy Edit doesn’t allow you to edit the Intro, Ending and Fill-ins. However, muting a Section in the
Style will result in automatic muting of the same Section in the Intro, Ending and Fill-ins. If you
mute a certain Section, you need to consider what effect it will have on the overall Style.
P. 78
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use Advanced Edit:
1) Select the Style and the Variation (1–4) that you would like to edit.
2) In the EASY STYLE EDIT screen, press the MORE button (F1). The Advanced Style Edit screen will be
displayed.
3) Use the F2–F7 buttons to select a Section to edit.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
Saves the changes to the User Conductor.
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Selects a sound for the Section.
Adjiusts the Reverb level.
Adjiusts the Chorus level.
Adjusts panning.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Adjusts the volume level.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Back to the EVENT STYLE EDIT settings.
F2–F7 Selects the Section to change. Pressing again will mute the
Section.
4) Use the L buttons to select a setting and use the Dial to change its value. You can make your edits
while the Style is playing to hear your changes.
5) Press the BACK (F1 button) to return to the Easy Style Edit screen.
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6) If you would like to save your edits, press the SAVE TO USER (R1) button. Your edits will be written
to the USER CONDUCTOR. If you don't save your edits, they will be lost as soon as you exit the
Advanced Style Edit screen.
7) Press the EXIT button to exit the Advanced Style Edit screen.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L3
L4
Selects the memory location (1 through 40)
where you wish to save your User Conductor
Style.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Names your Style.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Back to the Advanced Style Edit
F2, F3 Moves the cursor over the characters in the Style name.
F4, F5 Selects a character to enter as part of the name.
F7
Proceeds with saving the Style.
Important Note:
If you are using a User Style as the Source Style of your User Conductor, that User Style must
always be kept at the same location in the CP, or else the User Conductor will not be able to locate
it.
P. 80
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting the Style
You can restore the original Style settings by pressing the RESET button. This will completely clear
the changes made to the Styles except any data already saved as a User Conductor Style. You can
also instantly discard the current changes by pressing the EXIT button to leave the Advanced Edit
screen.
RESET
To use a saved User Conductor Style:
1) Press the USER CONDUCTOR button. If there are any User Conductor Styles available, they will be
displayed.
2) Use the F1–F4 buttons to select the page that contains your desired User Conductor Style.
3) Use the L or R button to select the desired User Conductor Style.
Use the L or R buttons to select your desired User
Conductor Style.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1-F4 Search for User Conductor Styles on the other pages.
F7 Deletes the selected User Conductor Style.
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making a New Style
This is the most flexible way to create a new Style.
You can make a completely new style from scratch or edit an existing style. First, read the explanation
below about the configuration of a style and understand how a style is made.
Configuration of a Style
A complete Style consists of the following patterns:
Basic pattern
Fill-in
Intro Major
Intro Minor
Ending Major
Ending Minor
4 patterns (Variation 1–4) Max 16 measures
4 patterns (Fill-In 1–4)
2 patterns
1 or 2 measures
Max 16 measures
Max 16 measures
Max 16 measures
Max 16 measures
2 patterns
2 patterns
2 patterns
• Each of these patterns in a Full Style is made up of six Sections—Drum, Bass, ACC1, ACC2,
ACC3 and ACC4. In an Intimate Style there are four Sections—Drum, Bass, ACC1, ACC2. In a
Solo Piano Style there are two Sections— ACC1, ACC2. You can use up to six sections in a User
Style but you don’t necessarily have to use all of the sections to create a Style. For example, just
like the Intimate and Solo Piano Styles you may not need to use some Variations or Sections to
accomplish your musical idea. These unused sections or variations may be left blank.
• The different Sections can be of varying bar lengths as long as they stay within the limit. Having
them all the same length may make the Style easier to use in a song, but you may find that having
uneven bar lengths among the Sections can create interesting musical results.
• For simplicity’s sake it is advisable to record your new style in the key of C.
To create a Style:
1) Press the ADVANCED RECORDER button. The LCD screen will display the Advanced Recorder menu.
2) In the Advanced Recorder menu, press the Style Maker button (R5). The LCD screen will display the
first Style Maker screen.
3) To make a completely new Style, press the Make New Style button (L1) and use the Dial to select the
time signature for the style you are going to make. To edit an existing style, press the Edit Existing
Style button (L3) and use the Dial to select the style you want to edit.
P. 82
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) Press the ENTER button (F7). The Style Maker Record screen will be displayed.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
R3
Changes the Time Signature.
L1
L3
L5
Selects Make New Style.
Selects Edit Existing Style.
Selects Phrase Combination.
Selects the Style you want to edit.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
R5
Selects the Initial Style.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Go to the Advanced Recorder menu.
Enters the selected Style Maker menu.
5) Use the L and R buttons to select which pattern to record.
6) Press the Bar Length button (R1) and use the Dial to change the bar length of the pattern.
7) Press the REC button (F7). The Style Maker Record screen will be displayed.
R1
Changes the bar length.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L3
L4
L5
Selects an Intro and Ending to record.
Selects a Variation and Fill-in to record
Copies a phrase from another pattern.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
R3
R4
R5
Selects an Intro and Ending to record.
Selects a Variation and Fill-in to record.
Saves the new Style to User Style.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the Style Maker menu.
Takes you to Style Maker Record screen.
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8) Use the L, R and F buttons to select the different record functions. Use the Dial to change the values.
9) Press the REC START button (R4) to start recording. There will be an automatic 2-bar count in.
10) Start playing on the keyboard. The recording is looping, which means when it comes to the end of
the last bar, it automatically goes back to the beginning of the first bar. In the Edit Existing Style, the
existing style will play.
R1
R2
Selects the Sound for the selected Part.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
L2
Selects the Part to be recorded.
Sets the recording tempo.
Selects the Quantize resolution. This is input
Quantize and your playing will automatically be
Quantized as you play.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
R4
R5
Starts the recording.
L5
Takes you to the Detail Setting menu.
Saves the Style to User Style.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Style Maker menu.
F2-F7 Switches between Play and Mute for the recorded Part.
Note:
Press the Detail Setting button (L5) to edit the detail settings for the Auto-accompaniment system.
See page 87 for an explanation of the Detail Settings.
P. 84
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11) To erase any unnecessary or incorrect notes, use the ERASE (F1) button. While the pattern is still
recording the notes will be erased as long as you press and hold the button.
12) When finished recording, press the REC STOP button (R4).
13) Follow the above procedure to record any other desired patterns as needed.
14) To save the recorded Style, press the SAVE button (R5). The Style Save screen will be displayed.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
R4
Stops the recording.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Erases the recorded notes.
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15) Press the PRESET TEMPO button (L1) and use the dial to set the default tempo for the style.
16) Press the SAVE TO button (L3) and use the Dial to select the location to save your new Style.
17) Press the NAME button (L4). Use the F2 and F3 buttons to move the cursor and use the F4 and F5
buttons or the Dial to select the characters to name the style.
18) Press the SAVE button (F7).
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
Sets the default tempo for the style.
L3
L4
Selects the location to be saved.
Names the style.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Style Maker Record screen.
F2, F3 Moves the cursor.
F4, F5 Selects the characters.
F7
Saves the style to User Style.
P. 86
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto-accompaniment System
The Concert Performer Auto-Accompaniment System (ACC) analyzes your playing and adjusts the
note data recorded in the different Phrases in a pattern to match the root key and chord type you
are playing. The ACC System also shifts the octave for each phrase to keep each section playing
within its musically useful range. To get the most out of this System, any new Style you create can
benefit from some fine tuning of these settings.
When you press the DETAIL SETTINGS button (L5) on the Style Maker Record screen, the Style
Maker Detail Settings screen will be displayed.
Accompaniment Type (ACC Type)
This setting determines how Phrases being played by a particular section in a pattern will be analyzed
by the Auto-accompaniment (ACC) System. There are Two Accompaniment Types: Chordal and
Scalic (melodic). Chordal Phrases usually consist of block chords or arppegiated chords. You
should set this kind Phrase to Chordal. Scalic Phrases usually play melodic phrases that serve to
add interest to the style as well as provide counter melodies and riffs. Melodic Phrases or Phrases
that contain chromatic passages should be set to Scalic. Scalic Phrases can also contain chords but
they will be analyzed differently than chords in a Chordal Phrase. The Bass section is automatically
set to Scalic since it will rarely if ever play chords.
The terms Open and Close apply to Chordal Phrases, and refer to how the CP will regulate the
voicing of a Chordal Phrase. Setting a Section to Open will allow for open-voiced chords, which
might be good for guitar and string sounds. Setting a Section to Close maintains closed voiced
chords, which are better suited to piano parts and other chording or comping instruments.
Range
This determines the chord inversions that a Chordal Phrase will play.
The term “range” here has nothing to do with the span of actual chord notes. It selects which note
in the chord will serve as the basis of the chord inversion.
HI is the initial setting and is recommended as a starting point. MID plays an inversion based on the
next lower note in relation to HI, while LO plays an inversion based two-notes lower.
Crossover
This determines the point where a Scalic Phrase will be transposed to keep the notes in a musically
useful range. When notes in a Scalic Phrase fall below the Crossover point you select they will be
transposed up one octave by the Accompaniment System. For example if you set the Crossover
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
point to E, the Phrase would begin to be transposed up one octave whenever you play a chord with
an E as the root.
Experiment with the different Chordal and Scalic settings to find the one that works best with each
Phrase.
Bass Limit
This is an option for the Bass section and sets the limit for the lowest note the Bass will play. If a
note in a Bass Phrase falls below the limit, it will automatically be transposed up an octave.
To adjust the auto-accompaniment system:
1) Use the L2-L4 buttons to select the setting you wish to change.
2) Use the F3-F7 buttons to select the Section.
3) Use the Dial to select or change a value.
4) When done, press the BACK button (F1) to go back the previous menu. Then save the Style if necessary.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
L5
Changes ACC Type.
Changes RANGE.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Changes CROSS OVER.
Changes BASS LIMIT.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Takes you to the previous menu.
Plays the style.
F3-F7 Selects the Section.
P. 88
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making a Style with Phrase Combination
Phrase Combination is similar to Easy Style Edit in the Conductor. Phrase Combination however,
lets you not only combine Phrases from within the selected Style but you can also combine Phrases
from any of the Styles in the CP to create a new Style. Additionally you can edit Fill-ins and basic
patterns (Variations).
• You cannot change the Intro and Ending Phrases. These will remain the same as in your selected
Style.
To use Phrase Combination:
1) In the Advanced Recorder menu, press the Style Maker button (R5). The LCD screen will display the
first Style Maker screen.
2) Press the Phrase Combination button (L5) and use the dial to select the initial style.
3) Press the ENTER button (F7) to proceed to the next screen.
4) Use the L2 and L3 buttons to select which of the four Fill-ins and Variations you would like to change.
5) Use the L3 and L5 buttons to select the Section to change.
6) Use the F4 and F5 buttons to move the cursor between the Style and Phrase column.
7) Use the Dial to change the current Style or Phrase. You can jump to the desired Style category by
pressing the Style select buttons directly.
8) Press the PLAY button (F2) to listen to the new Style.
9) Press the SAVE button (F7) to save the new Style.
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
Selects the pattern to change. Choose Variation
1–4 or Fill-in 1–4.
R2
Selects the pattern to change. Choose
Variation 1–4 or Fill-in 1–4.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L3, L5 Selects the Section to be modified.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Takes you to the previous menu.
Plays the new style.
F4, F5 Moves the cursor between the Style and Phrase columns.
F7 Saves the modified data as a new Style.
10) Press the PRESET TEMPO button (L1) and use the dial to set the default tempo for the style.
11) Press the SAVE TO button (L3) and use the Dial to select the location to be saved.
12) Press the NAME button (L4). Use the F2 and F3 buttons to move the cursor and use the F4 and F5
buttons or the Dial to select the characters to name the style.
13) Press the SAVE button (F7).
P. 90
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
Sets the default tempo for the style.
L3
L4
Selects the location to be saved.
Names the style.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Style Maker Record screen.
F2, F3 Moves the cursor.
F4, F5 Selects the characters.
F7
Saves the style to User Style.
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Style Convert
Style Convert is a technology originally developed for personal computers by EMC Software. Kawai
is proud to have licensed it for use in our musical instruments. This software reads many of the
commercially available Style data disks made by several popular keyboard manufacturers and
converts them for use with the Concert Performer. This conversion process is extremely easy, and
once converted the Style can be re saved in The CP’s own Style format.
To use the Style Convert Program:
1) Make sure that there is an empty location in the User Style area to hold the converted Style. The
Style Convert program will automatically save the converted Style there.
2) Press the DISK button. The LCD screen will display the Disk Menu.
3) Press the STYLE CONVERT button (R4) on the DISK menu. The Style Convert screen will be displayed
and prompt you to insert the Style Convert program disk in the floppy drive.
4) Insert the program disk in the drive and then press the F7 button to continue. Press the F1 button to
cancel the Style Convert process.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Cancels conversion process and goes back to the DISK
menu.
Proceeds with the conversion.
P. 92
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) After the CP reads the program, it will display a list of the manufacturers Style formats that can be
converted. Use the L2 and L4 buttons to select the format you would like to convert. Press the F7
button to continue.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2, L4 Selects a Style format.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the previous screen.
Proceeds with the conversion.
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6) Insert the appropriate manufacturers Style disk when you are asked to do so. Press the EXEC button
to proceed.
7) Select the desired Style to convert and press EXEC button. The CP will begin converting that Style.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2, L4 Selects the desired Style from the disk.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the previous menu.
Proceeds with the conversion.
8) When the conversion is complete, the SAVE USER STYLE screen will be displayed. Save the new
converted Style using the same procedure as saving a new User Style.
• You have just learned the basic procedure to convert other manufacturers Style formats. For
detailed information on the Style Convert program, read the instruction sheet that comes with
the software. There you will find a list of which manufacturers formats are supported. For
technical information contact EMC Software directly at the location listed on the instruction
sheet.
• An optional style conversion software package for use with a personal computer is also available
from EMC software. It is called “Style Works 2000 Kawai”. It offers more features than the
internal conversion program. To inquire about obtaining it, contact your local Kawai dealer or
distributor.
P. 94
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Your Own Styles
P. 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Sounds
Even though the Concert Performer has over 900 high quality
instrument and drum sounds built-in, there may be times when you
would like to change some of the qualities of a sound to really get
the tonal character that you have in mind. The CP allows you edit
certain settings for individual sounds. You can choose to change
subtle nuances of the sound or even drastically change the sound’s
character to the point where you can no longer recognize what it
was originally! Once you have made these changes, you can save
up to 20 User Sounds in the User Sound Category, or a virtually
unlimited number onto floppy disks.
Editing the Preset Effect Settings
Each of the CP instrument Sounds has preset Chorus and Effect settings that are applied
automatically whenever that sound is selected.
You can change these settings to suit your tastes and save them so they become the preset settings
for that Sound.
To adjust the settings:
1) Select the sound you want to edit and press the SOUND EDIT button (F7). The LCD screen will
display the Sound Edit Menu.
2) Press the L2 button to select Edit Preset Sound Settings. The Preset Sound Settings screen will be
displayed.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Selects Edit Preset Effect Settings
Selects Make User Sound.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
P. 96
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3) Press the L1 button and then turn the Dial to select which preset sound you wish to modify.
4) Use the L and R buttons to select the different effect settings and use the Dial to change their value.
5) When you are finished, press the SAVE button (F7) to save your settings.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Selects the preset sound to edit.
Turns the Chorus on/off.
Turns the Effect on/off.
R2
Adjusts the chorus level.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects an effect type.
R4, R5 Adjusts the effect setting.
Adjusts the effect setting.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the previous menu.
Saves the settings.
• Pressing the SAVE (F7) button will save all changes made in the Preset Effect Settings menu. If
you exit the Preset Effect Settings menu without saving your changes, the settings will remain
unchanged.
Editing Sounds
P. 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making a User Sound
There are two steps to making a User Sound: Editing the effect settings—same as described in the
previous section—and editing the sound’s character.
You can adjust six parameters of the sound character: Vibrato Depth, Brightness, Attack, Decay,
Sustain, and Release.
Brightness controls the Strength of the high frequencies. Higher values produce a brighter sound,
lower values produce a darker sound.
Vibrato Depth controls the depth of the Vibrato effect. Positive values produce a deeper Vibrato.
Negative values produce a shallower Vibrato. The actual speed of the vibrato is preset for each
sound.
Attack determines how quickly a sound reaches its maximum volume after you press a key. Positive
values produce a slower attack that is more gradual and smooth, while negative values produce a
faster attack that is more percussive in nature.
Decay determines how quickly the volume of the sound decreases after it reaches it maximum
volume while the key is still held down. Positive values produce a slower decay, while negative
values produce a faster decay.
Sustain determines the volume level of the sound after the decay portion of the sound is complete.
Positive values produce a louder volume, while negative values produce a softer volume.
Release determines how long it takes for the sound to fade away to silence after you release the
key. Positive values produce a slower fade, while negative values produce a faster fade.
Note:
For some sounds, changing the values for these parameters may have no effect. Each sound has a
pre-programmed setting for each of these parameters. When you change the values you are increasing
or decreasing the value from the pre-programmed setting. If the setting for a certain sound parameter
is 0 for example, then changing the value will have no effect.
P. 98
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To make a User Sound:
1) Select the sound you want to edit and press the SOUND EDIT button (F7). The LCD screen will display
the Sound Edit Menu.
2) In the Sound Edit menu, select Make User Sound (L3). The User Sound Settings screen will be
displayed.
3) You can edit the settings for Vibrato, Brightness, Attack, Decay, Sustain and Release.
4) Use the F3 and F4 buttons to select a setting and use the Dial to change its value. You can always
play the keys as you edit the sound, enabling you to hear what changes are being made.
5) Press the MORE button (F2) to edit the Effect Settings for your new sound, which is the same screen
as described in the previous section.
6) If you would like to save the changes you have made, press SAVE (F7). Otherwise press BACK (F1) to
return to the previous menu or use the EXIT button to go back to the main Sound Edit menu.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
Takes you to the previous menu.
Takes you to the Preset Effect Settings menu.
F3, F4 Move the cursor.
F7 Proceeds with saving the sound.
7) If you press SAVE (F7), the Save To User Sound screen will be displayed. Use the L3 button to select
Save to User Sound on the screen. Use the Dial to select the User Sound location number where you
want to save your new Sound. You can name the sound by using the F2-F5 buttons. Pressing the
SAVE button (F7) one more time will save the sound.
Editing Sounds
P. 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L3
L4
Selects the location where the sound will be
saved.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Names the Sound
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the previous menu.
F2, F3 Moves the cursor.
F4, F5 Selects the character.
F7
Saves the editted sound to User Sound.
• To select and play your new User Sound, press the USER SOUND button located in the SOUND
section of the front panel, then select the desired User Sound.
P. 100
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Sounds
P. 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Songs from a Floppy Disk
The Concert Performer’s floppy disk drive provides a convenient
way to playback songs recorded in the CP’s Internal Format or
Standard MIDI File (SMF) format. Songs in the CP’s internal format
typically are ones that you have recorded on your own instrument.
There are many sources of SMF songs, including disks for sale from
professional musicians and publishers, songs shared among
musicians and hobbyists, and Internet sites that feature SMF songs
available for download.
If you wish to play a song without any intentions to make permanent
changes or additional recordings, you can use the CP’s Disk Song
Play function to load the song very quickly for playback. Using the
disk drive in this way makes the Concert Performer an enjoyable
source of entertainment for parties and other social events, as well
as a great tool for the professional musician or music educator.
About songs on Floppy Disk
If you will use a blank disk to store and play your own compositions made on the Concert Performer,
there isn’t much to worry about. The CP can format the disk (if it isn’t already formatted), and the
CP’s internal song format remembers everything about your song, including which sounds to use
with the recorded tracks. However, if you wish to purchase a disk of songs from your music store
or publisher, play a disk given to you by someone else, or play songs downloaded from the Internet,
you will need to remember a few simple points:
• The CP reads only DOS formatted disks, either double-sided double-density (720KB) or high
density (1.4MB). These are the most commonly used disk formats in both computers and musical
instruments.
• The CP recognizes song files written in the Standard MIDI File format as long as they have DOS
file names ending with “.MID”. There are two types of Standard MIDI File formats, Format 0 and
1. The CP can read the song data of both formats, however it will only display the lyrics of a song
written as format 0.
• Songs that have been composed with the General MIDI (GM) standard will sound fine without
any additional work, because data in the files will inform the CP as to what sounds to use when
playing the song. If the song was not composed to the GM standard, you may find it necessary to
edit the song to assign the correct sounds to the various tracks. Fortunately, almost all
commercially available MIDI files adhere to the General MIDI standard.
P. 102
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The CP can also recognize most songs formatted for the PianoDisc player piano system and
songs formatted for Yamaha’s Disk Orchestra Collection. (Please check with your Kawai dealer
or distributor for further information).
Selecting a Song from Disk
A single floppy disk can store dozens of song files at one time, depending on the length of the songs.
To select a song:
1) Put the disk in the Floppy Disk Drive and press the DISK button. In the Disk menu, select Song Play
(R3). After the CP searches the disk it will display the first ten available songs. If there are more
than ten songs on the disk, use the SEARCH buttons (F2, F3) to list the additional songs.
2) Use the L and R buttons to select the song you want to hear. You can also select a song by using the
Dial.
MEDIA
DISK
CD
3) Once your desired song is highlighted, press PLAY/STOP to have the CP load the song and automatically
start playing. You may also press SELECT (F7) to have the CP load the data and wait for you to start
it manually.
4) Press the SONG CHAIN (F4, F5) buttons to have the CP automatically play all songs, one after another.
5) When your selected song is ready to play, the Disk Song Play screen is displayed. Use the Recorder
control buttons on the left side of the panel to control the playback of the song.
Playing Songs From a Floppy Disk
P. 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
The L and R buttons select the song you want to
hear.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Disk menu.
F2, F3 Lists the next or previous ten titles.
F4, F5 Starts the Chain Play.
F7
Selects the song and takes you to the Disk Song Play screen.
P. 104
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Playback of a Song
As the song plays, you can adjust the tempo, play or sing along with on the keyboard, and even turn
on/off the different instrument parts (tracks) in the song.
The status of the song parts is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen. You will see the parts
referred to as the CP’s four Parts + Style if the song was created on the CP, or as Channels (ch 1-16)
if the song is a MIDI file. Displayed above each part is its current status:
PLAY
MUTE
– – – –
The part will be heard when you play the song.
The part has data, but it won’t be heard when you play the song.
The part has no data to play.
• Transpose and Octave Shift are available when a song is playing. Octave Shift affects only the
notes you play “live” on the keyboard, not the music playing from the song file. Transpose can
be applied separately to the keyboard sound and the song sounds. This lets you play the keyboard
in your preferred key along with a song recorded in a different (or more difficult) key.
Use the front panel’s dedicated TRANSPOSE buttons to affect the keyboard sound. Use the
Song Transpose option (R4 and R5) in the Disk Song Play menu to affect the song data.
• The Song Transpose option is available only for the song data in Standard MIDI file.
To make adjustments to the song:
1) In the Disk Song Play screen, use the R1, R2, R3, and L3 buttons to highlight and assign sounds to
the CP’s four keyboard Parts. These will be the sounds that you can play live from the keyboard as
the song is playing. Once a Part is highlighted, press any of the Sound category buttons to select a
new sound.
2) Use the F buttons to play and mute any of the song’s instrument parts.
3) Press the L4 button to use the Mixer to make adjustments to the song’s instrument parts. (See page
49 for the Mixer function.)
4) Use the R4 and R5 buttons to transpose the song data.
5) Use the panel TRANSPOSE and OCTAVE SHIFT buttons to adjust the CP’s keyboard Parts.
6) Press the PLAY/STOP button to start the song.
7) To adjust the tempo, press the L2 button and use the Dial to change values.
8) Press the PLAY/STOP button again to stop the song.
Playing Songs From a Floppy Disk
P. 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
R2
R3
Highlights the SOLO Part.
Highlights the RIGHT1 Part.
Highlights the RIGHT2 Part.
L2
L3
L4
L5
Adjusts the song’s tempo.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Highlights the LEFT Part.
R4, R5 Transposes the song (but not the keyboard).
Takes you to the Mixer screen.
Displays the song’s lyrics (if available in the data).
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Disk Song Select menu.
F2-F5 Turns the song part on/off.
F6, F7 Displays the status of the next set of 4 song parts. (Ch 5–8,
Ch9–12, Ch 13–16).
P. 106
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the song you are playing has lyrics included in the data, the Show Lyrics (L5) button will appear
on the Song Play screen. If you press the Show Lyrics button, the song’s lyrics will then appear
inside a box. You can follow a ball moving over the lyrics as the song plays. Press the Full Screen
(R5) button to expand the lyrics display to the full screen. Press the Normal Screen (F1) button to
return to the normal lyrics screen.
In the normal lyrics screen, press the F1 button to return to the Song Play screen
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1, R2 Transposes the song.
L2
Adjusts tempo.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
R5
Displays the lyrics on the full screen.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Returns to the Song Play screen.
F2-F5 Turns the song parts on/off.
F6, F7 Displays the status of the next set of 4 song parts (Ch 5–8, Ch9–
12, Ch 13–16).
• You cannot record or permanently edit the song while using the Disk Song Play function. If you
would like to record your live performance along with the song from the disk, or if you want to
make detailed and permanent edits to the song, you will need to load the song’s data into the
Recorder using the Disk Load function. See the chapter “Recording a Song” (page 42) for details
on how to record a song, and “Floppy Disk Operations” (page 156) for an explanation of how to
load a song into the Recorder.
Playing Songs From a Floppy Disk
P. 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing with Concert Magic
Thanks to Kawai’s innovative CONCERT MAGIC (CM) feature,
absolutely anyone can sit at the Concert Performer and experience
the joy of being a real performing musician… even if they have
never touched a musical instrument in their life!
As you play a CM song, a handy Note Navigator display helps you
keep track of where you are in the music, as well as suggesting
how the rhythm of the song should be tapped out on the keys.
Many of the CM songs have lyrics that can be displayed as the song
is being performed. As the song is played, a Bouncing Ball makes
its way over the lyrics, following the player’s performance and
encouraging everyone around the instrument to sing along.
Concert Magic allows you to play a song by simply tapping any key
on the keyboard. Regardless of what keys you play, the notes that
are heard will be the correct ones for the song. However, what
makes this really exciting is that you control the timing of the notes,
as well as their dynamics. This lets you add a level of expressiveness
and individuality to the song that makes it real musical performance.
The Concert Performer can also automatically play any of the
Concert Magic songs. Listening to the song first can make it easier
to play. There is also a Chain Play mode, giving you options to
listen to groups of CM songs.
Selecting a Concert Magic Song
The 176 on-board Concert Magic songs are divided into eight groups by song category: Children’s
Songs, American Classics, Patriotic Songs, Christmas Songs, Hymns, Classics, Special Occasions,
and International songs.
• In addition, you can create and play your own Concert Magic songs using the floppy disk drive.
To select a song:
CONCERT
MAGIC
1) Press the CONCERT MAGIC button. The song selection menu will be displayed.
2) Ten song titles from the Children’s Songs category will be displayed. The category name is displayed
at the very top of the screen. If you want to go to another song category, press SEARCH BY CATEGORY
(F1, F2). You can also search for a specific title by using SEARCH BY NAME (F3, F4), which will list
all 176 song titles in alphabetical order. You may also use the Dial to scroll through all the titles one
after another.
• If you wish to play a CM song from floppy disk, press the DISK button (F6) to see the list of songs
on disk.
3) When you have found the song that you want to play, use the L or R buttons to move the box over the
title. Press the SELECT button (F7) to choose it. The Note Navigator screen will be displayed, and
you are ready to perform!
P. 108
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
The L and R buttons select the desired song.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Searches by song category.
F3, F4 Searches by song name.
F5
F6
F7
Enters the Chain Play mode of the Concert Magic.
Searches for a song on floppy disk.
Can also select the song.
Performing a Concert Magic Song
Playing the Concert Magic song you’ve selected is very easy. Just begin tapping any key on the
keyboard and the song will play. Concert Magic plays the correct notes of the song, but you must
provide the rhythm. Being familiar with how a particular song sounds does make it easier, but
watching the Note Navigator screen can help you play a song that you’ve never heard before.
The Note Navigator provides an outline of the song’s rhythm that looks a lot like the real music. The
dots (•) in the display are the notes that you play. The spacing of the notes gives a clue to the timing
(rhythm) of the notes. Notes that are closer together are played faster; notes that are farther apart
are played longer. Notes that are evenly spaced are played evenly, and so on.
Up to four lines of music are displayed. After you’ve played past a note in the song, the dot becomes
a cross (+) to help you keep track of where you now are. When you get to the bottom of the screen,
the top lines change to show the next lines of music, as if you had turned the page. When you get to
the end of the song you will see a double line, and then the song will reset to the beginning.
Playing with the Concert Magic
P. 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To play a selected CM song:
1) In the Note Navigator screen press START (F4) if you want to first listen to the song. The CP will play
the song. Press the STOP (F4) button to stop. Notice how the Note Navigator displays the rhythm as
the song is playing.
2) If you wish to play the CM song yourself, start tapping any of 88 keys while the song is stopped, and
the song will play.
3) Press the RESET (F4) button at any time to start at the beginning of the song again.
4) To play another song, press the SONG LIST buttons (F6, F7) to display the list.
5) If you have selected a song that has lyrics, you may view them by pressing the LYRICS button (F1,F2)
6) If you would like to play any song by steady tapping (instead of following the original rhythm), press
the STEADY BEAT button (F3).
7) To exit Concert Magic, simply press the CONCERT MAGIC button again.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Displays the selected song’s lyrics, if available.
F3
F4
Allows you to play any song by steady tapping.
Starts and stops the song. Also used to reset the song when
performing.
F5
Saves the changed Sounds.
F6, F7 Selects another song.
P. 110
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Returns to the Note Navigator screen.
F3
F4
Allows you to play any song by steady beat tapping.
Starts and stops the song. Also used to reset the song when
performing.
F5
Saves the changed Sounds.
F6, F7 Selects another song.
• When you reach the end of the song, press any key one more time. This will not produce sound,
but instead resets the song to the beginning for another performance.
• The Bouncing Ball only works with song files that are specifically designed for Concert Magic to
take advantage of this feature.
• A Concert Magic song is made of two parts - a melody part and accompaniment part. Many of the
songs have different instrument sounds assigned each part to make the music more interesting.
You can select different sounds for each part separately. The RIGHT1 Part plays the melody. To
change its sound, press any Sound category button and select a new sound. The LEFT Part
handles the accompaniment. To change its sound, first turn off the RIGHT1 Part and then press
any Sound category button to select a new sound. Don’t forget to turn the RIGHT1 Part back on
before you begin to play.
• You can use the PIANO ONLY button to quickly change the sound for both parts to the Concert
Grand piano.
Playing with the Concert Magic
P. 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• You can also activate the RIGHT2 Part to use as a layer (additional sound) for the melody. In
addition, if you know the melody to a Concert Magic song you can play along by activating the
SOLO Part. Remember, you must play the notes of the melody when the SOLO sound is active.
You can also select any new sound for the RIGHT2 and SOLO parts. Turn off all Parts except the
one you wish to change, and then select the new sound. Don’t forget to turn all necessary Parts
back on before you begin to play.
• You can save your new sound settings by pressing the SAVE button (F4). The Soft Reset function
will be required to return the sounds to their original settings (see page 144).
TRANSPOSE
• You can transpose the song by pressing the TRANSPOSE buttons.
To enter the Chain Play mode of the Concert Magic:
1) Press the CONCERT MAGIC button. The song selection menu will be displayed.
2) Press the CHAIN PLAY button (F4). The Chain Play menu will be displayed.
3) Use the L and R buttons to highlight a setting, then turn the Dial to change that setting. You can
choose to play songs from any one category, or to play all 176 CM songs. You can also choose to use
each song’s preset sounds, or to play the songs using the Concert Grand piano sound only.
4) Press the PLAY button (F4) to start playing the songs.
5) To exit Concert Magic, press the CONCERT MAGIC button again.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L4
Selects Play mode.
R2
Selects the song category.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects Sound mode.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F4
Starts the chain play.
F6, F7 Returns to the song list.
P. 112
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Concert Magic Song Arrangements
Concert Magic songs are specially arranged so that they will work well with your key tapping. Each
of the 176 CM songs falls into one of three categories of musical arrangements of varying difficulty.
EASY BEAT
These are the easiest songs to play. To perform them, simply tap any key with a constant beat. You
can easily see which songs are Easy Beat songs when you look at the Note Navigator. The dots will
line up at a constant interval in the screen, indicating a constant beat.
MELODY PLAY
These songs are also quite easy to play, especially if you are familiar with them. To perform them,
tap the keys to the rhythm of the melody (as if you were singing).
SKILLFUL
These songs are more challenging. To perform them, carefully follow the rhythm as shown in the
Note Navigator. It may require some practice to successfully play these songs. Even skilled players
will enjoy the challenge that these songs offer.
Steady Beat Play
After you choose a song, you can press the STEADY BEAT button (F3) to play the song by steady
tapping instead of the original rhythm. You can play any song from any arrangement category by
tapping steady beats.
Playing with the Concert Magic
P. 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Concert Magic Song
You can also use Concert Magic to play a song that isn’t one of the 176 built-in titles. You can record
a new song using the Concert Performer’s Recorder and then save on a floppy disk as a Standard
MIDI File (SMF). The song can now be selected by pressing the DISK button when you are in the
Concert Magic song selection screen.
• You can also record a song for Concert Magic by using an external sequencer. Remember to save
it to a floppy disk as a Standard MIDI File.
As you might imagine, getting your song to sound exactly the way you want it to in Concert Magic
may require a few adjustments to the original arrangement. The most important consideration is to
keep the musical arrangement as simple as possible. Concert Magic “pauses” the song after every
note as it waits for you to tap the next key. If there are complex rhythm patterns that have many
notes per beat, the song may become overly difficult to play. Here are some suggestions for creating
a Concert Magic song:
1) Record the melody first using the RIGHT 1 Part in the Easy Recorder (or Track 2 in the Advanced
Recorder).
2) Then record the accompaniment using the LEFT Part in the Easy Recorder (or Track 4 in the Advanced
Recorder).
3) Arrange the accompaniment so that its notes fall on the same beats as the melody. (This creates a
Melody Play arrangement.)
4) If you want to be a little more adventurous, insert a few carefully placed accompaniment notes in
between melody notes. (This creates a Skillful arrangement.)
5) If you are recording your song using an external sequencer, record the melody on channel 2 and the
accompaniment on channel 4.
6) For best results, you should quantize your parts.
• Of course, these are merely suggestions. There are no steadfast rules for how to compose your
CM song. In fact, very rewarding musical experiences may come out of simple trial and error.
P. 114
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing with the Concert Magic
P. 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Menu
The System Menu contains all of the functions that affect the overall
performance of the CP piano. This includes functions such as the
System settings, tuning, and MIDI Setup. By adjusting these settings
you can tailor the CP’s performance to your taste.
To use the System menu:
SYSTEM
1) Press the SYSTEM button. The SYSTEM button LED will light and the System menu is displayed.
2) Use the F1 and F2 buttons to access the System Menu pages.
3) Use the L, R and F buttons to select the function you wish to change. A sub-menu with further options
for that function will be displayed.
4) Use the L, R and F buttons to choose a setting from the sub-menu and use the Dial to change its
value.
•
•
If you would like to have the CP remember your settings and have them immediately applied
every time you turn the instrument on, select Power Up Setting (Page 2-R1) from the System
menu, and choose “Save Current Settings” (L2).
For further details on resetting data, see page 144.
P. 116
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R1
R2
R3
Selects the Concert Magic Sound mode.
Selects the Pedal functions.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Selects the overall tuning of the CP.
Selects the Touch Curve (Key velocity sensitivity).
Selects the Equalizer settings for the CP.
Selects the Voicing settings.
Selects the Fill-in mode for the
Accompaniment Styles.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
R4
R5
Selects the SOLO part settings.
Selects Video Out settings
Selects the Resonance effect for the sustain
pedal.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Selects the different System Menu pages.
R1
R2
R3
Selects the Power up mode settings
Restores the initial factory settings.
Displays the software version.
L 1
R 1
L1
L2
L3
Selects the Effect priority settings.
Selects the Temperament settings.
Selects the MIDI settings.
L 2
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Selects the different System Menu pages.
System Menu
P. 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuning
Tuning allows you to adjust the CP’s pitch. You may need to adjust the tuning when you play with
other instruments.
The master pitch is displayed in Hertz. The range of adjustment is from 427.0 to 453.0 Hz. The
factory preset value is set to the modern standard A = 440.0 Hz.
•
You can also adjust the tuning for each Part separately. This can be used to simulate a chorus-
like effect by layering the same sound in RIGHT1 and RIGHT2 and slightly detuning them. Each
Part can be raised or lowered by up to 50 cents. (50 cents = 1/4 tone).
L 1
R 1
R 2
L 2
L2
L3
L4
Selects the master pitch.
R3
R4
Selects the pitch for the RIGHT1 Part.
Selects the pitch for the RIGHT2 Part.
Selects the pitch for the LEFT Part.
Selects the pitch for the SOLO Part.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
P. 118
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touch Curve
When playing a piano, the volume of the sound produced increases in direct relation to how hard a
key is struck. The CP’s Normal Touch curve offers the standard feel of an acoustic piano for practicing
music. The CP offers six other touch curves ranging from light to heavy. You can also create your
own touch curves tailored to your personal playing style.
Normal
This is the standard touch of an acoustic piano.
Light 1, 2
For those still developing finger strength, such as a child, a louder sound is
produced even when the piano is played with a soft touch. Light 2 is lighter than
Light 1.
Heavy 1, 2
Off
Perfect for those with strong fingers. Requires a heavier touch to produce a loud
volume. Heavy 2 is heavier than Heavy 1.
A constant volume is produced regardless of how hard the keys are struck. This
setting is suitable for sounds that have a fixed dynamic range such as Organ or
Harpsichord.
User 1, 2
You can create two of your own custom touch curves.
•
LIGHT and HEAVY do not represent the physical weight of the keys. These are settings that
affect the sensitivity of the keys, which determines the volume level in response to the key
movement.
L 1
R 1
R 2
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Selects the normal setting.
Selects a moderately light touch.
Selects a light touch.
R2
R3
R4
Selects the User 1 touch.
L 2
Selects the User 2 touch.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects a moderately heavy touch.
Selects a heavy touch.
Turns off the Touch sensitivity entirely.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the System menu.
Takes you to the User Touch Curve screen.
System Menu
P. 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Touch Curve
You can create your own custom touch curve to fit your playing style. Two User Touch curves can
be saved.
To create a User Touch Curve:
1) Press the EDIT button (F7) in the Touch Curve screen. The LCD screen will display the User Touch
screen.
2) Now start playing dynamically from soft to loud in order to let the CP analyze your playing style.
While you are playing, a musical note e will blink in the right corner of the LCD display.
3) Press the CREATE button (F7) when you finish playing. The CP will analyze your playing and create
a custom touch curve for you based upon your playing style. The User Touch Exec screen will be
displayed.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the previous menu.
Creates a user touch curve.
P. 120
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) Use the Dial to select either User 1 or User 2 as the location for your new touch curve.
5) Press the EXEC button (F7) to save your new touch curve.
6) The CP will ask for your confirmation. Press YES (F7) to confirm.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the Dial to select either User 1 or User 2 as the
location for your new touch curve.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Cancels the saving procedure.
Proceeds with saving procedure.
•
The user touch curve data is saved automatically even after the power is turned off. However,
You must re select the user touch curve each time the power is turned on unless you make your
User touch curve the default by selecting “Save Current Settings” from the Power Up Settings
screen (See Power Up settings on page 143).
System Menu
P. 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System EQ
The System EQ allows you to adjust the tone character of the CP piano to your taste. In addition to
a Flat EQ setting (no EQ), there are four special EQ settings optimized for each of the CP models
and four general purpose EQ settings. There is also a User EQ, that allows you to edit the existing
EQ settings or create your own EQ settings.
•
The System EQ affects the overall tone character of the CP speakers and the Line Out Jacks
(The CD-R Drive is not affected by the System EQ). The special CP EQ’s are optimized for the
speaker systems on different CP models. When connecting the Line Out Jacks to an external
source the Flat EQ setting is recommended.
•
The Flat EQ setting is the default. If you want to save a different EQ setting as the default you
must select the “Save Current Settings” on the Power Up Settings screen (See Power Up Settings,
page 143).
L 1
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to select your desired EQ setting.
L 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the previous menu.
Takes you to the User System EQ screen.
P. 122
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To create a User EQ:
1) Select one the ten EQ settings to edit and press the EDIT button (F7). The LCD screen will display the
User System EQ screen.
2) Use the F2, F3 buttons to move the cursor and use the Dial to change the value.
3) Press the SAVE button (F7) to save the edited EQ settings to the User EQ.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2, F3 Moves the cursor.
F7 Saves the edited EQ settings to User EQ.
Takes you to the System EQ menu.
System Menu
P. 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Voicing
Voicing is a technique used by piano technicians to mold the character of a piano’s sound. The
Voicing function lets you change the CP piano’s tone quality by choosing one of four types of voicings.
Normal
Produces the normal timbre of an acoustic piano throughout the entire dynamic
range. This is the default setting.
Bright
Mellow
Dynamic
Produces a brighter tone throughout the entire dynamic range.
Produces a mellower tone throughout the entire dynamic range.
The tone will change dramatically from mellow to bright according to your
playing.
•
•
The current voicing selection is global for all the instrument Sounds. You can not have an
individual setting for each Sound.
While voicing is a technique used for optimizing the tone of an acoustic piano, this function can
be used on all the Sounds on the CP piano.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Selects Normal.
Selects Mellow.
R2
R3
Selects Dynamic.
Selects Bright.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
P. 124
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resonance
When the sustain pedal is depressed on an acoustic piano, all the dampers are lifted up allowing the
strings to vibrate freely. In this condition, when you play a note not only will the strings for the note
you played vibrate but other strings will vibrate due to sympathetic resonance. The Resonance
function simulates this phenomenon. You can select from three levels of Resonance.
Off
No resonance.
Normal
Deep
Simulates the natural resonance characteristics of an acoustic piano.
Produces a more intense resonance.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R2
Turns off the resonance.
L2
L3
Selects normal resonance.
Selects deep resonance.
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
System Menu
P. 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Concert Magic Sound
This function determines which sounds the Concert Magic songs will be played with.
Preset
Piano
Plays all the Concert Magic songs with the Preset Sounds assigned to each song.
Plays all the Concert Magic songs with the Concert Grand piano.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Selects Preset sounds.
Selects Piano sound.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
P. 126
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pedal Assign
The Soft and Sostenuto pedals on the Concert Performer function as much more than just traditional
piano pedals. These pedals can be assigned to control various other functions on the CP piano.
With an optional expression pedal connected to the EXP pedal jack, you can also control the volume
for each Part.
Damper Pedal (Right)
Sustain only
Can be activated or deactivated separately for each Part.
Pedal assignment options for Soft Pedal (Left) and Sostenuto Pedal (Center)
Soft
Softens the sound and reduces its volume.
Sustains only notes that were held when pedal was depressed.
Controls start/stop for Styles and Songs.
Turns the instrument Harmony function on/off.
Switches from one Registration to another. You may choose the order,
1 to 8 or 8 to 1.
Sostenuto
Start/Stop
Harmony on/off
Registration
Style Variation
Switches from one Style Variation to another. You may choose the
order, 1 to 4 or 4 to 1.
Intro/Ending
Fill In
Plays the Intro or Ending.
Plays the Fill-in currently selected.
Break
Interrupts the whole Style.
Drums Only
Sync/Fade Out
Glide
Interrupts the Style except Drum part.
Controls the SYNC/FADE OUT button.
Bends the pitch up and down as programmed by you.
Applies programmable vibrato to the sound.
Modulation
Rotary Fast/Slow Controls the speed of rotary speaker effect. This function will be
automatically assigned to the Soft Pedal (Left) when a sound that has
the rotary effect turned on is selected as the Priority Part.
Left Hand Hold
Holds the notes played in the LEFT/SPLIT Part as long as the pedal is
depressed.
Panel Lock
Locks all buttons on the panel to prevent them from being tampered
with or pressed accidently while you are playing. Press the assigned
pedal once to lock the panel buttons. Press the assigned pedal again to
unlock the panel buttons.
System Menu
P. 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXP Pedal (Optional)
Expression
The Expression pedal controls the volume of Parts. Expression can be
activated or deactivated separately for each Part.
•
The pedal assignments made to the Left pedal will be saved as part of a Registration. The pedal
assignments made to the Center pedal are global and are not saved as part of a Registration.
1) Select the Pedal Assign (R2) option in the System menu (page 1). The LCD screen will display the
Pedal Assign screen. Use the L buttons to select which pedal you want to make assignments for.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
L2
L3
L4
Selects the Right pedal (Damper).
Selects the Center pedal (Sostenuto).
Selects the Left pedal (Soft).
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects the Expression pedal.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
P. 128
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) Use the L and R buttons to select the setting and use the Dial to change its value.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
Selects a function to assign to the pedal.
Use the other L and R buttons to adjust parameters.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Back to the pedal Assign menu.
F3-F6 Selects the different pedals.
System Menu
P. 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fill-in Mode
This determines whether or not a Fill-in will be automatically played each time a VARIATION button
is pressed.
There are two options.
Normal
Auto
A Fill-in will not be automatically played each time a VARIATION button is
pressed. Fill ins will only be played if a FILL button is pressed.
A Fill-in will be played each time a VARIATION button is pressed. The Fill-in
that is played will be the one that accompanies the Variation that you are leaving.
For example, if Variation 1 is currently active, and you select Variation 2, the
Fill-in for Variation 1 will be played.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Selects Normal mode.
Selects Auto mode.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
P. 130
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Solo Settings
This configures the special settings for the Solo part.
Since the Solo part allows you to play only one note at a time (monophonic), it is important to select
which note will be played by the SOLO Part when more than one key is played at a time.
There are three options.
Top Note
Last Note
The SOLO Part plays only the highest note among the notes played at one time.
The SOLO Part plays only the last key played among the notes played at one
time. When the last key is released, the SOLO Part will play the last previous key
played and so on.
No Retrigger
The SOLO Part plays only the last key played among the notes played at one
time, but when that key is released the SOLO Part will stop playing.
When using Portamento, you can adjust Portamento Time which determines how long it takes for
the pitch to slide up or down from one note to the next.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Selects the note priority.
Adjusts Portamento time.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the previous menu.
•
You can access this screen by holding down the PORTAMENTO button for a few seconds.
System Menu
P. 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Out
This function is used select the type of video signal that will be output by the Video Out Jack.
NTSC
PAL
OFF
The TV video signal system mainly used in North American countries and Japan.
The TV video signal system mainly used in the European countries.
The video signals are not output.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
Selects NTSC.
Selects PAL.
Selects OFF.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
P. 132
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effect for Sound
This function determines whether or not the Preset Effects settings assigned to each Sound will be
used or not.
Preset
Panel
The Preset Effect settings for each Sound will be used. This is the default setting.
The Preset Effect settings for each Sound will not be used. In other words, changing
the Sounds will not change the Effect types and other settings for the Effects. This
allows you to set each Effect section (REVERB, CHORUS, and EFFECTS) to your own
taste and use your Effect settings for all sounds. The Panel setting is very useful if you
only want to use certain Effects at all times or if you want to prevent the Effects from
constantly changing each time you select a new Sound.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Selects Preset.
Selects Panel.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
System Menu
P. 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperament
The CP offers not only equal temperament (the modern standard) but also immediate access to
temperaments popular during the Renaissance and Baroque periods.
You can also create your own User tuning Temperament as well.
1) Select Temperament form the System Menu. The LCD screen will display the Temperament screen.
2) Select your desired Temperament with the L and R buttons.
3) Set the Temperament Key with the F2 and F3 buttons.
4) If you select Equal temperament, use the F5 and F6 buttons to set Stretch Tuning to On, Off, or Piano
Only. (For an explanation of Equal and Equal Stretched tuning see page 135).
Stretch=On: Applies the Stretched Tuning to all instrument Sounds.
Stretch=Off: Stretched Tuning is turned Off for all the instrument Sounds Off.
Stretch=Piano (only): Applies the Stretched Tuning only to the Piano Sound. The tuning for any other
active sounds layered with a piano sound will be stretched to match the piano. If no piano sound is
active the tuning for any active sounds will not be stretched.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Selects Equal.
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
Selects Werckmeister.
Selects Kirnberger.
Selects Arabic 1.
Selects Arabic 2.
Selects User.
Selects Meantone.
Selects Pure Major.
Selects Pure minor.
Selects Pythagorean.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
F2, F3 Selects the Temperament Key.
F5
F7
Selects the Stretch tuning type On/Off/Piano.
Takes you to the User Temperament screen.
P. 134
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brief explanation of temperaments
Temperament Keys
Limitless modulation of the key became available only after the invention of Equal temperament.
When you use a temperament other than Equal temperament, you must carefully choose the key to
play in. For example, if the song you are going to play is written in D major, choose “D” to set the
temperament key.
Equal Temperament ( Flat)
This is an “unstretched” equal temperament that divides the scale into twelve equal semitones. This
produces the same chordal intervals in all twelve keys, and has the advantage of limitless modulation
of the key. However the tonality of each key becomes less characteristic and no chord is in pure
consonance.
Equal Temperament ( Stretched)
This is the most popular piano temperament and is the initial setting. The hearing ability of a
human is uneven and is not as accurate with high frequency and low frequency as it is with the
middle range. This temperament’s tuning is stretched to compensate for this so the sound will be
heard naturally to the ears. This “Stretched” equal temperament is a practical variation of the
“unstretched” equal temperament which was invented on a mathematical basis.
Pure Temperament
This temperament, which eliminates dissonances for thirds and fifths is still popular for choral
music because of its perfect harmony.
You need to be aware what key you are playing in with this temperament. Any key modulation will
result in dissonances. When you play music in a particular key, you need to match the key of the
temperament as well.
Pythagorean Temperament
This temperament, which uses mathematical ratios to eliminate dissonance for fifths, is very limited
for use with chords, but it produces very characteristic melodic lines.
Meantone Temperament
This temperament, which uses a mean between a major and minor whole tone to eliminate dissonance
for thirds, was devised to eliminate the lack of consonance’s experienced with certain fifths for the
Pure temperament. It produces chords that are more beautiful than those with the equal temperament.
System Menu
P. 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Werckmeister III, Kirnberger III Temperament
These two temperaments are placed in between Meantone and Pythagorean. For music with few
accidentals, this temperament produces the beautiful chords of the mean tone, but as accidentals
increase, the temperament produces the characteristic melodies of the Pythagorean temperament.
It is used primarily for classical music written in the Baroque era to revive the original characteristics.
Arabic
Some oriental scales, including the Arabic, are characterized for “quarter-tone” which is half of a
half-tone (50 cents). This makes the music sound very different from traditional western music.
The CP Piano provides two of the most popular Arabic scales, although you can create more
variations with the User Temperament function. With Arabic 1, the notes B and E are a quartertone
lower than the Occidental Scale, while the notes A and E are lower with Arabic 2.
To create a User Temperament:
1) On the Temperament screen, press the EDIT button (F7). The User Temperament screen will be
displayed.
2) Use the KEY buttons (F3, F4) to select the note to edit.
3) Use the Dial or TUNE buttons (F5, F6) to change the value. The value is represented in cents above
or below Equal temperament and ranges from –50 to +50.
4) Press the SAVE button (F7) to save the User Temperament.
P. 136
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F3, F4 Selects the note to edit.
F7 Saves the User Temperament.
Takes you to the Temperament menu.
• The User Temperament alters the tuning for each octave equally. In other words, you cannot
alter the tuning of different sections of the CP’s keyboard range separately.
System Menu
P. 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Menu
The letters MIDI stand for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, an international standard for
connecting MIDI equipped synthesizers, drum machines, and other electronic instruments so that
they can exchange data. Personal computers can also be equipped for MIDI communication.
Electronic instruments equipped with MIDI can transmit and receive performance data such as,
notes, what sound to play, pedal information, volume, etc. through the MIDI In/Out/Thru Jacks.
This data can be recorded with a device like a sequencer or a computer.
• In this manual we will only discuss the basic MIDI functions that pertain directly to the CP. For
detailed literature on MIDI, please visit the music department of your local bookstore.
On page one of the MIDI Settings menu you can configure the following settings.
Right Transmit Channel
Sets the MIDI Transmit Channel for the RIGHT hand Parts. You can select MIDI Channels 1-16.
Left Transmit Channel
Sets the MIDI Transmit Channel for the LEFT/SPLIT Part. You can select MIDI Channels 1-16.
Chord Transmit Channel
Sets the MIDI Transmit channel the Chord data created by the Accompaniment System when it
analyzes the notes you play in the lower section of the keyboard. You can select MIDI Channels 1-
16 and OFF. OFF disables MIDI transmission of the chord data.
Chord Detect Channel
Sets the MIDI receive channel for chord data being sent to the CP. The Accompaniment System can
be controlled remotely on this MIDI channel by an external MIDI controller. You can select MIDI
channels 1-16, OFF, All, or MIDI Accordion. When set to ALL the Accompaniment System will
respond to any chord data it receives on ANY MIDI channel.
Local Control ON/OFF
This determines whether the CP’s sound will be played from the piano’s keyboard (“ON”) or only
from an external MIDI instrument (“OFF”). Even with local control “off” the CP’s keyboard will
still transmit to an external MIDI instrument or personal computer.
P. 138
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock
Clock is a data code that a MIDI instrument uses as the reference for its Tempo settings as well as
Style Start/Stop commands. When it is set to INTERNAL, the CP uses its own built-in clock to
control tempo settings. When set to EXTERNAL, the CP reads the clock data that it receives via
MIDI and uses this data to control the Tempo.
To configure the MIDI Settings:
1) On page 2 in the System menu, press the MIDI (L3) button. The LCD screen will display the first MIDI
page.
2) Use the L and R buttons to select the setting and use the Dial to change the values.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
L4
L5
Selects Transmit channel for the RIGHT Part.
Choose 1–16.
R2
R3
Turns Local Control on/off.
Selects the Clock source.
Selects Transmit channel for the LEFT Part.
Choose 1–16.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects Transmit channel for the chord data.
Choose 1-16 or OFF.
L 5
R 5
Selects the chord detect Receive channel.
Choose 1–16, OFF, All, or MIDI Accordion.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1-F4 Selects the other MIDI Settings pages.
System Menu
P. 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmit MIDI Data
On page two of the MIDI Setting menu you can determine what MIDI data will be transmitted from
the CP.
“Keyboard = On/Off” Determines whether or not note data that is generated by the keys being
played will be transmitted.
“Program = On/Off” Determines whether or not the CA piano will transmit program change
information when a Sound is selected on the CP.
“Control = On/Off” Determines whether or not changes in controllers (such as the pedals being
depressed) will be transmitted.
“Expression = Key/Acc/Both” Determines whether or not the Expression data (CC# 11) for notes
played on the keyboard, by the Auto Accompaniment System, or both should be transmitted.
“System Exclusive = On/Off” Determines whether or not all of the CP’s settings will be transmitted
in a special format that is understood by another CP.
“Clock = On/Off” Determines whether or not the CP’s Clock data will be transmitted.
“ACC = On/Off” Determines whether or not the data from the Auto Accompaniment System will be
transmitted.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R2
Selects whether System Exclusive data is
transmitted.
L2
L3
Selects whether note data is transmitted.
Selects whether Bank and Program Change data
is transmitted.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
R3
R4
Selects whether Clock data is transmitted.
Selects whether Auto-accompaniment data is
transmitted.
L4
L5
Selects whether Controller data is transmitted.
Selects whether Expression data is transmitted L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1-F4 Selects the other MIDI Settings pages.
P. 140
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On page three of the MIDI Settings menu, you can determine which MIDI channels the CP will
receive MIDI data on. The CP can receive MIDI data on all 16 MIDI channels at once or only certain
MIDI channels.
Channel Receive On/Off
Each of the 16 MIDI channels can be set separately to On or Off.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L2, R2, L4 and R4 buttons to select the channel
and use the Dial to change the setting, On and Off.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1-F4 Selects the other MIDI Settings pages.
System Menu
P. 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Accordion
On page four of the MIDI Settings Menu you can configure the CP to be played from a MIDI Accordion.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R2
R3
Selects receive channel for the Bass (Right2)
part. Choose 1-16.
L2
L3
Selects receive channel for the Solo (Solo) part.
Choose 1-16.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Selects receive channel for the Chord (Left)
part. Choose 1-16.
Selects receive channel for the Melody (Right1)
part. Choose 1-16.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1-F4 Selects the other MIDI Settings pages.
P. 142
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Up Settings
This determines whether the CP stores your preferred panel and system settings as the default
settings and applies them automatically when the instrument is turned on.
Select Save Current Settings (L2) in the Power Up Setting menu to save the current panel settings
automatically as the default settings when the CP is turned on.
Select Restore Factory Settings (L3) to return the CP to the factory default settings. The original
factory settings will now be used by the CP when it is turned on.
• The CP never automatically stores Panel and System settings. If you make any new changes that
you want to save, you must use the Save Current Settings (L2) command.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Saves the current settings.
Restores the initial factory settings.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the System menu.
Applies the selected settings.
System Menu
P. 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Soft Reset
The Soft Reset function allows you to return all of the User Settings back to the original Factory
Settings. You can instantly reset all of the user settings or only the ones you want to Reset at the
touch of a button.
To perform a Soft Reset:
1) Press SOFT RESET button (R2) on Page two in the System menu. The Soft Reset screen will be
displayed.
2) Use the L and R buttons to choose type of data you want to reset.
3) Press EXEC button (F7).
4) Press YES (F7) to proceed, or NO (F1) to back out.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
R2
R3
Selects User Sounds.
Selects User Styles.
Selects User Conductor.
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Selects Regist Groups.
Selects Conductor.
Selects Sound Settings.
Selects Concert Magic.
Selects System Settings.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
R5
Selects ALL.
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the System menu without resetting data.
Proceeds with the Reset.
P. 144
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Version
This function is used to show what system software version is currently installed in the CP.
To show the software version:
1) Press the Software Version button (R3) on page two in the System menu.
2) The software version will appear in the LCD screen.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the System menu.
System Menu
P. 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Control
This function controls the background screen design, brightness and Screen Hold of the display.
Screen Hold
Most of the on-screen menus that you work with on the Concert Performer will remain displayed
until you select something or press a particular button. However, some screens may be displayed
only temporarily, switching back to a main screen if you allow the CP to sit idle without pressing
any buttons. You can adjust a time setting for how long these screens stay displayed before switching,
or even choose to have them hold without switching.
This adjustable time function is effective with the following menus:
• Sound Select menu
• Style Select menu
• Solo Settings menu called up by holding down the PORTAMENTO button.
• Effect Settings menu called up holding down the EFFECT button.
• Chorus Settings menu called up by holding down the CHORUS button.
• Harmony Settings menu called up by holding down the HARMONY button.
1) Press the DISPLAY CONTROL button on the panel.
2) Use the L and R buttons and the Dial to change the settings.
L1-L3 TSelects the background screen design.
R1-R3 Selects the background screen design.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L4
Adjusts the brightness of the screen (0-9).
R4
R5
Turns the Screen Hold On and Off.
Adjusts the time before switching when the
Screen Hold is Off (5-20 seconds).
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
P. 146
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Control
P. 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mic Harmony and Effect
The Concert Performer has a microphone input jack. You can plug
in a microphone and sing while playing on the CP. You can also
“mic” other instruments or plug other electric instruments into the
microphone input. The Mic Harmony and Effect buttons add
various harmonies and effects to your mic input.
Mic Harmony
This function adds many types of harmony to your mic input coming into the microphone input of
the CP.
Type of Harmony
Vocorder
Trio (Sub)
Trio Mix (Sub)
Duet
Duet Spread
Duet Close
Duet Up
Octave Duet (Sub)
Octave Duet Up (Sub)
Octave Up
Gender Male to Female
Gender Female to Male
Quartet
Quartet Mix
Quartet with Bass
Jazzy Quartet
Jazzy Qurtet Mix
Chorale
Octave Down
Octave Up (Sub)
Octave Down (Sub)
2 Octaves Down
2 Octaves Down (Sub)
Double
Stereo Double
Double (Sub)
Lead Substitution
Duet (Sub)
Duet Spread (Sub)
Duet Close (Sub)
Duet Up (Sub)
Octave Duet
Octave Duet Up
Trio
Trio Mix
Trio Up
To add Mic Harmony:
MIC
1) Press the MIC HARMONY button. The button’s indicator light will show that it has been activated.
2) If you wish to change the Harmony type, hold down the MIC HARMONY button for a moment until the
Mic Harmony types are listed in the LCD display.
HARMONY EFFECT
3) Use the L and R buttons to choose Harmony type. If you want to edit the settings, press EDIT (F7)
button. Use the L buttons and the Dial to change the settings.
4) Use the F1-F4 buttons to list more Harmony types on the other pages.
P. 148
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to choose a Harmony type.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1-F4 Searches for a Harmony type on the other pages.
F7 Enters the detailed settings.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Adjusts the Harmony level.
Selects the source of chord recognition if the
Vocoder harmony is selected.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Back to Mic Harmony menu.
Mic Harmony and Effect
P. 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About Mic Harmonies
Many of the microphone harmonies rely upon chord information generated by the Auto-
Accompaniment style system. For these harmonies to operate, the ACC button music be ON. Other
harmonies do not rely on the Auto-Accompaniment stystem for chordal information. These
harmonies will operate whether or not the ACC is ON.
Non-Chordal Harmonies
These harmonies do not rely on chordal information from the ACC system. They include the Vocodor,
Gender, Octave, Double, and Lead Substitution harmonies. In the case of the Vocodor, the harmonies
created are taken from the notes actually played on the keyboard, or the notes actually found in a
chosen sequencer track.
Use the EDIT button to choose the KEYBOARD or SEQUENCER TRACK to use as the harmony
source.
The Gender Male to Female and Gender Female to Male harmonies actually change the pitch and
quality of your voice as indicated by the harmony names. The various Octave harmonies add a
voice up or down as indicated by the harmony names.
The Double harmonies add a recording studio quality effect to your voice to make it thicker and
smoother sounding. The effect is similar to the “double-tracking” vocal technique performed in
professional recordings. The Lead Substitution harmony replaces your voice with one that has
been pitch-corrected.
Chordal Harmonies
All other harmonies rely on chordal information from the Auto-Accompaniment system to operate.
If the ACC button is ON, then you will hear harmony based upon the note that you are singing,
chord you are playing and the harmony that is chosen. The active chord will be indicated in the
upper left-hand portion of the display. You can play chords in the Single Finger, Fingered, or Whole
Kybd Modes of the ACCOMPANIMENT system.
P. 150
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Duet Harmonies create one harmony note in addition to the lead note. Trio harmonies create two
harmony notes in addition to the lead note. Quartet harmonies create three harmony notes in
addition to the lead note. Octave Duet harmonies create one harmony note and one octave note in
addition to the lead note.
The lead note will be your own voice, unless the harmony name contains the word (Sub). In this
case, your voice will be substituted with one that is pitch-corrected.
Note:
If you have chosen a chordal harmony but do not turn on the ACC ON/OFF button, the instrument
will substitute the Vocoder harmony. Once you turn on the ACC ON/OFF button, the harmony will
switch to the one you have actually chosen.
Tips and Suggestions
Don’t be afraid to experiment with different harmony types. After a little trial and error, you will
begin to learn which harmony type will be most appropriate for a particular musical setting. The
Harmony names will help you find the appropriate harmony type. For a fuller harmony effect,
choose one of the Quartet harmonies.
For lighter harmonies, choose a Trio or Duet harmony. Words such as “Mix”, “Up”, and “Spread”
will give you further clues to the function and sound of the harmony.
Make sure to adjust both your mic input volume (found beside the Mic Input Jack) and the Mic
Level parameter in the Mic Effects menu. Also, adjust the Harmony Level (found by pressing the
EDIT button in the Harmony Type screen) for the best results.
All Mic Harmony and Effects settings are saved in a Registration. This makes recalling any Mic
Harmony and Effects quick and easy.
Mic Harmony and Effect
P. 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mic Effect
There are six different Mic Effects available to enhance the audio signal (Voice or instrument sound)
coming from the microphone jack. All effects, except the Echo/Vibrato, operate independently of
one another. The Mic Effect function is separate from the Effects assigned to the keyboard Parts.
Therefore, you can use different effects on the keyboard sounds and on Vocal/instrument sounds
from the microphone.
Type of Effect
Equalizer
The equalizer allows you to adjust the tonal Character of the Mic input (voice, instrument, etc) by
raising or lowering the volume level of the High, Mid and Low frequencies separately. Raising the
Values increases the level of the frequency. Lowering the values reduces the level of the frequency.
Gate
This effect mutes the signal from the Mic input (Voice, Instrument, etc) when the input level (volume)
falls below a specified setting. This is useful for cutting out softer, extraneous background noise
(cars, air conditioners, etc) while still allowing the desired, louder signal (Vocal, instrument etc.) to
be heard. This can be very useful for recording to the CD-R in a noisy room.
Higher Gate settings cut out more background noise. 0 - All sounds are heard. 100 - Almost no
sound is heard.
Compressor
This effect reduces the volume of very loud input levels above the specified threshold. Reducing the
loud input levels can enhance soft signal levels that are weak and helps to smooth out the overall
volume level of a performance.
Threshold - Determines how loud the input must be before it is compressed. Higher settings provide
less compression. 0 - All input levels are compressed. 100 - No input level is compressed. Setting
Threshold to 50 will compress only the louder input levels for more natural compression.
Ratio - Determines how much the input level will be compressed (reduced). Higher values produce
more compression. Compression ratios between 1.6 and 5 are best for Vocals.
P. 152
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
The suggestions given for the Gate and Compressor should be considered starting points. By
experimenting you will find the settings that work best for you. Remember often times it is not
necessary to use any Gating or Compression at all.
Echo
Adds delay or echoes to the sound.
Time - Determines the delay time between each echo. Higher values add longer delays.
Level - Determines the volume of the first echo. Each echo will become softer after that. Higher
values create louder echoes.
Feedback - Determines how many echoes will be heard after the first echo. Higher settings produce
more echoes.
Vibrato
Adds a controlled vibrato to the sound.
Rate - Determines how fast the vibrato will be. Higher values produce faster vibrato.
Depth - Determines how strong the vibrato effect will be. Higher values produce deeper vibrato.
Note:
Echo and Vibrato cannot be used together.
Reverb
Adds reverberation to the sound simulating the ambience of a stage or concert hall. Reverb can be
used along with the above effects. Higher settings add more Reverb.
Mic Harmony and Effect
P. 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mic Effect Parameters
Low
Mid
High
THRESHOLD
RATIO
TIME
LEVEL
FEED BACK
ECHO
MIC LEVEL
EQ
GATE
COMPRESSOR ECHO/VIBRATO
VIBRATO
REVERB
RATE
DEPTH
To add Mic Effect:
1) Press the MIC EFFECT button. The button’s indicator light will show that it has been activated. Any
effect that is active in the Mic Effect menu will be turned on.
MIC
HARMONY EFFECT
2) If you wish to change or edit the effect types, hold down the MIC EFFECT button for a moment until
the Mic Effect menu is displayed.
3) Use the L and R buttons to highlight the Effect types. Use the DIAL to adjust the value of the highlighted
effect.
4) If you want to edit the settings of a highlighted effect, press EDIT (F7) button. Use the L buttons and
the Dial to change the settings.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R2
R3
R4
Turns the Compressor On and Off.
Turns the Echo/Vibrato On and Off.
Adjusts the Reverb level.
L2
L3
L4
Adjusts the Mic level.
Turns the EQ On and Off.
Adjusts the Gate time.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F7
Edits the chosen Effect.
P. 154
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Back to Mic Effect menu.
F2, F3 Selects Low Range.
F4, F5 Selects Mid Range.
F6, F7 Selects High Range
Mic Harmony and Effect
P. 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Floppy Disk Operations
The Concert Performer has a built-in 3.5” floppy disk drive that
can read and write to double-density (720KB) or high-density
(1.4MB) disks. These are the exact same disks that are used with
your personal computer. You can use floppy disks to quickly and
easily build up an extensive library of Concert Performer data that
can be shared with other CP owners.
disk so the student may play along. This can greatly assist the
learning process. Finally, there are numerous sites on theWorld
Wide Web dedicated to the sharing and selling of MIDI music that
can be downloaded and played on your Concert Performer
instrument. For instructions on how to use one of these Song Disks
on your CP, see “Playing Songs from a Floppy Disk” on page 102.
There are many companies who specialize in just making MIDI song
files of popular and traditional tunes that can be purchase on floppy
disk. In fact, these days almost any popular song that you can think
of has probably been turned into a MIDI file by someone! Many
publishers of piano lesson books now provide the music on floppy
The CP comes with a special program called Style Converter on a
floppy disk. This allows you to convert Styles that were made for
a number of other manufacturers’ machines, and use them as if
they were designed for the CP. See the separate instructions that
came with the Style Converter disk for additional information.
Disk Menu
The Disk menu is where you can work with various disk operations. There are six functions that
you can choose from, including access to the Style Converter feature.
To work with a disk:
MEDIA
1) Press the DISK button. The Disk menu will be displayed.
2) Use the L and R buttons to select the preferred function.
DISK
CD
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
P. 156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R2
R3
Formats a floppy disk.
L2
L3
L4
Loads data from a floppy disk.
Saves data onto a floppy disk.
Erases data from a floppy disk.
Plays the song data from a floppy disk.
(See page 106.)
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
R4
Converts other manufacturers’ Style data
for use in the CP. (See page 89.)
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
Saving Data to a Floppy Disk
This important function stores your custom data to disk so that you can retrieve it at a later time.
You can save the following data:
S o n g
Song data currently in the Recorder. You can save it as the CP’s
own unique format (Internal) or as Standard MIDI File format
(SMF) or Stylist format (Internal format plus Registration setting).
Each User Style or all 20 User Styles at once.
Us e r St yle
Us e r C o n d u ct o r Each User Conductor setting or all 40 User Conductor settings at
once.
Us e r S o u n d
Re gis t Gr o u p
Each User Sound or all 20 User Sounds at once.
Each Registration Group, containing 8 Registrations, or all 20
Registration Groups at once.
Us e r To u ch
Two User Touch Curve settings.
Us e r Sys t e m E Q One User System EQ setting.
Te mp e r a me n t
All Se t t in gs
One User Temperament setting.
This allows you to save the current settings of all 8 of the above
data types at once, as a single file.
Floppy Disk Operations
P. 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save your data:
1) In the Disk menu, select SAVE (L3). The Disk Save menu will be displayed.
2) Use the L and R buttons to select the type of data to save. Then the particular sub-menu for that data
type will be displayed.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to select the type of data
to save.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Disk menu.
3) Use the appropriate L button, CURSOR buttons (F2, F3) and CHARACTER buttons (F4, F5) to give the
data file a name.
When saving a Song, use the L3 button and the Dial to select whether the song data file will be in the
INTERNAL (CP’s unique) format, or SMF (Standard MIDI File) format or Stylist format.
• The data saved in Stylist format can be called up only in Song Stylist mode.
• When you select SMF format, data in the style track will be automatically pasted to tracks 9-16.
This will erase any existing data on tracks 9-16.
4) Make sure that a formatted floppy disk is in the drive. Then press the SAVE button (F6, F7) to save
the selected data to the disk.
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
P. 158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example: Saving a Style
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L3
L4
Selects which file you would like to save, or if all
files are to be save as a single “all” file.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Names the data file.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the previous menu.
F2, F3 Moves the cursor over the characters in the name.
F4, F5 Selects a character to use in the name.
F7
Saves the data file to floppy disk.
Example: Saving a Song
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Names the data file.
Selects which format the data should be saved
as.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Floppy Disk Operations
P. 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Data from a Floppy Disk
This function allows you to retrieve the stored data from disk.
Song
User Style
One Song can be loaded into the Recorder from disk.
Up to 20 Styles can be loaded from disk. This number varies depending on the
size of the data contained in the Styles.
User Conductor Up to 40 User Conductor setups can be loaded from disk.
User Sound
Regist Group
User Touch
Up to 20 User Sounds can be loaded from disk.
Up to 20 Groups, containing 8 Registrations each, can be loaded from disk.
Two User Touch Curves can be loaded from disk.
User System EQ One User System EQ can be loaded from disk.
Temperament
All Settings
One User Temperament can be loaded from disk.
Loads the “All Settings” file on disk.
To load the data from a disk:
1) In the Disk menu, press LOAD (L2). The Disk Load menu will be displayed.
2) Insert your floppy disk into the drive.
3) Use the L and R buttons to select the type of data to load. Then a sub-menu will be displayed that
lists all available files of that type.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to select the type of data
to load.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1 Takes you to the disk menu.
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
P. 160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) When loading User Style, User Conductor, User Sound or Registration data, you can choose whether
to load data that was stored individually or to load all the data that was saved as an “All” file. Press
ALL (F4) to load data that was saved as an “ All” file. Press EACH (F5) if data files were saved
individually.
5) Use the L and R buttons to select the data to load. Use the PAGE (F1, F2) buttons to display more
data, if available.
6) Press the EXEC (F7) button to proceed. The screen will display the destination where the data will be
loaded.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to select the data to load.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the previous menu.
F2, F3 Displays more selections.
F4
Selects the “All” file type if that is how the files were
saved.
F5
F7
Displays data files that were saved individually.
Proceeds to the next screen.
Floppy Disk Operations
P. 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7) When loading an individual data file, use the L3 button and the Dial to select the preferred destination.
8) Then press the EXEC button to load the selected data into the CP. Press BACK (F1) to cancel loading.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L3
Selects the destination to load individually a Style,
Conductor, Sound or Registration.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Takes you to the previous menu.
Loads the data.
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
P. 162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing Data from a Floppy Disk
This lets you erase unnecessary data from the floppy disk.
You can erase Song, User Style, User Conductor, User Sound, Registrations, User Temperament and
ALL.
To erase the data from a disk:
1) In the Disk menu press DELETE (L4). The Disk Delete menu will be displayed.
2) Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
3) Use the L and R buttons to select the type of data to erase. A sub-menu of file names will be
displayed.
4) When you erase User Style, User conductor, User Sound or Registration, determine whether you are
going to erase individual data files by pressing EACH (F5) or the “All” data file by pressing ALL (F4).
5) Press EXEC (F7) to erase the selected data from the disk. Or press BACK (F1) to cancel erasing and
go back to the previous menu.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to select the data.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the previous menu.
F2, F3 Displays more selections.
F4
F5
F7
Displays the “All” data file if present.
Displays individual files.
Proceeds to the next screen.
Floppy Disk Operations
P. 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Formatting a Floppy Disk
Before a floppy disk can be used to save data for the first time, it will need to be formatted. This
simply means that the disk must be “prepared” to hold data.
The Concert Performer can read and write to MS-DOS formatted disks. You can purchase pre-
formatted floppy disks from any computer or office supply store. Floppy disks may also be formatted
on a PC computer, or the CP can format them itself. There are two types of 3.5” floppy disk in the
market, 2DD (which can hold 720KB of data) or 2HD (which can hold 1,440KB or 1.44MB of data).
Both can be used in the exact same fashion with the Concert Performer.
• You can always re-format a disk at any time. Keep in mind, though, that every time you format a
disk, all data that is currently on it will be erased. Re-formatting is a good way to completely
erase a disk that might have been used previously on a computer, since there may be all sorts of
irrelevant data files left on it otherwise.
To format a disk:
1) In the Disk menu, press FORMAT (R2). The Disk Format menu will be displayed.
2) Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
3) Use the L2 or L3 buttons to select the size of disk you are using, 2HD or 2DD.
4) Press EXEC (F7) to proceed. The screen prompts you for confirmation.
5) Press YES (F7) again to start formatting. Or press NO (F1) to cancel formatting and go back to the
previous menu.
• It takes about a minute to format a floppy disk. Once the formatting is complete, the LCD screen
returns to the Disk menu automatically.
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
P. 164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Formats a 2HD disk.
Formats a 2DD disk.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Cancels formatting and takes you to the Disk menu.
Starts formatting the disk.
Floppy Disk Operations
P. 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD-R Operations (CP205 only)
With the Concert Performer’s built-in CD-R drive, you can record
your performances to CD-R and CD-RW discs. You can record a
“live” keyboard performance, a pre-recorded song from the
Recorder, or both. Even your live vocal performance can be
recorded to CD. Your finished CD can be played in any audio CD
player.
The Concert Performer can also playback CD-R and CD-RW discs,
along with any regular audio CD, including commercial CD’s.
1) Insert a blank CD-R or CD-RW into the CD-R drive and press the CD button on the panel.
2) The LCD screen shows the CD menu.
3) Use the L and R buttons to select your desired function.
• When you insert a blank CD into the drive, only the Record option will be available in the menu.
Unavailable options will be shown in gray. After your first recording, all options will be available.
• When a Closed (finalized) audio CD is in the CD drive, pressing the CD button will automatically
jump to the CD Play menu in the LCD screen. You can return to the CD menu by pressing the
MENU button.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L2
L3
Shows CD Play screen.
R2
R3
Shows Close CD screen.
Shows CD Record screen.
Plays the CD only from the headphone jack
on the CD drive unit.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
P. 166
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing an audio CD
The operation of the Concert Performer’s CD is similar to a regular CD player.
1) Insert an audio CD in the CD drive and press the CD button on the panel. If the CD is closed (finalized),
then the LCD screen will jump to the CD Play screen. If the CD is open (not finalized), then press the
Play (L2) button in the menu to go to the Play screen.
2) Press the F3 button to start the CD.
3) Use the L, R and F buttons to select the various CD songs and functions. Use the Dial to change the
value.
R1
R3
Selects the Play mode. All = Plays all tracks.
Select = Plays the selected track only. Random
= Plays all tracks at random. Program = Plays
the tracks in programmed order.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L1
L2
L3
Turns the Repeat mode On and Off.
Selects the track number.
Adjusts the CD volume.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Shows the Play Time.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F3
F4
Returns to the CD menu.
Stops the CD.
Plays the CD.
Returns to the beginning of the playing track or goes back
to the previous track.
F5
F6
F7
Rewinds the CD.
Forwards the CD.
Skips to the next track.
• Some of the copy protected CD’s may not play in the CD drive of the Concert Performer.
CD-R Operations
P. 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the playing order:
1) Press the R1 button in the menu and use the Dial to change the play mode to Program.
2) Press the L2 button and use the Dial to select the first playing track.
3) Press the F7 button to move the cursor to the next position and use the Dial to select the second
track.
4) Repeat step #3 to program up to ten tracks.
Select “Program” with the Dial.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the F7 button and the Dial to program.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
P. 168
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording onto a CD
You can record any performance on the Concert Performer directly onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
Your performance can be “live” playing with or without auto-accompaniment styles. It can also be
a previously recorded song playing from the Easy or Advanced Recorder, and even a voice or
instrument from the Mic input. Any, and all, of these performances can be recorded onto the CD.
You must record vocals, or any instrument using the Mic Input, directly to the CD. (The Easy/
Advanced Recorder cannot record from the Mic Input)
Multiple songs (tracks) can be recorded onto CD, up to the full time capacity of the disc. Once a
song is recorded to CD, the Concert Performer cannot erase it.
1) Insert a blank or open CD in the CD drive and press the Record button (R3) in the CD menu. The CD
Record screen will be displayed in the LCD screen.
2) The Concert Performer will check the CD and automatically set the recording track number.
3) Press the REC button (F3). The CD is ready to start recording.
4) If you start an Accompaniment Style, or start the Recorder, the CD recording will automatically start.
5) You can manually start the recording by pressing the PLAY button (F5) in the screen.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
R1
Shows the remaining time available for
recording.
L1
L2
L3
L4
Shows the recording track number.
Adjusts the volume for the Style.
Adjusts the Tempo.
R2
R3
R4
Adjusts the volume for the SOLO Part.
Adjusts the volume for the RIGHT 1 Part.
Adjusts the volume for the RIGHT 2 Part.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
Adjusts the volume for the LEFT Part.
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2
F4
F5
Takes you to the CD menu.
CD Record button (Record Ready)
Stops the recording.
Starts the CD recording.
CD-R Operations
P. 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Tips and Suggestions
• Anyone can have fun making CD recordings and sharing them with family and friends. You do not
have to be a professional musician to record your own CD. If you are not a great player, you can first
record your song using the Concert Performer’s Easy Recorder. You can record the song slowly and
speed it up later. You can even re-record it if you make a mistake. Advanced users can edit mistakes
and add extra tracks in the Advanced Recorder. When your song is perfect, set the CD to Record
and press Play on the Recorder. Your perfected performance will be recorded to the CD.
• If you want to begin your CD recording with live playing or vocals, you will need to press the PLAY
button (F5) to manually start the recording. (See steps #4 and #5 above). If you want to begin with
a Style or Recording, press the Play or Start button in the corresponding areas of the panel.
• Vocals can be sung along with the Easy/Advanced Recorded songs and/or live keyboard performances
while recording onto the CD. In other words, you can play up to a 16-part sequence (from the Easy/
Advanced Recorder), play along with the sequence on the keyboard, and sing into the microphone
at the same time. All of this will be recorded to the CD.
• The Style Start/Stop and Recorder Play/Stop functions are independent from the CD Record Start/
Stop functions. You can start and stop Styles and Recordings while continuing to record to CD.
• While recording to CD, the panel of the Concert Performers operates normally. You can add and
change sounds, balance the volumes, and change accompaniment styles during your CD recording.
Highlight a Part or Style field with the L and R buttons, then turn the Dial to change the volume.
Press any SOUND category button to change the sound for a highlighted part. Press any STYLE
category button to change the Style.
• You can also change Registrations while recording to CD. This is a quick and easy way to make lots
of changes to sounds and styles while recording to CD.
• Advanced Users with computer sequencers can even record an external sequence into the CD using
the Concert Performer’s internal sounds.
• It may take a few experimental recordings to get volumes mixes and settings perfected for a good
result. This is especially true if you plan to sing and play or play “live” along with the Easy/Advanced
Recorder.
P. 170
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Closing (Finalizing)Your CD
To listen to your recorded CD in a regular (audio) CD player, you must first Close (finalize) the CD.
Until you close the CD, you can listen to it only with the CD drive on the Concert Performer. Once
you close the CD, you cannot record on it any more.
1) Press the Close CD button (R2) in the CD menu.
2) Press the EXEC button (F7) to close the CD. Press the MENU button (F1) to cancel and go back to the
CD menu.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F7
Cancels and goes back to the CD menu.
Closes the CD-R
Tips and Suggestions
• A Closed CD can be played on any audio CD player, including car stereo and personal computers.
You can give your CD to friends, family, or anyone.
• If you have a personal computer with the appropriate CD drive and software, you can save your
CD recordings to computer. You can then make duplicate CD copies to send to others, deleting
any bad tracks (songs), or mixing and matching songs from other CD’s that you’ve recorded.
• The Concert Performer’s CD drive records and plays audio CD’s only. You cannot play or record
other forms of CD’s, including CD-ROM’s and data CD’s.
• A song recorded on a CD-RW disc can be erased by a personal computer with the appropriate CD
drive and software, or by a stand-alone CD-RW recorder/player.
CD-R Operations
P. 171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Assistance: Using Help and Demo
The first time you sit at the Concert Performer, you may feel
overwhelmed by the wealth of features and options that it offers.
You will find, though, that if you keep this Owner’s Manual handy
you can learn to use the different functions as you need them, at
your own pace. And, there is certainly nothing wrong with only
using a few basic features, and thoroughly enjoying them. After
all, the Concert Performer is first and foremost a musical
instrument, and its whole purpose is to provide you with the tools
for musical expression and fun no matter your skill level.
There are times when you might not have the Owner’s Manual at
your side, and you need an explanation of a button or feature.
Fortunately, there are built-in Help guides to give you a hand. The
Help function provides a basic introduction and overview of most
of the features found in the CP.
There are also many built-in Demostration songs that really show
of the musical potential of the Concert Performer. These songs
were composed by some of the top musicians in the music industry,
and will undoubtedly impress and inspire you.
Using the Help
To get Help, simply press the HELP button to the left of the display. The display will show an
explanation on the function or feature that you are presently working on. Help is available at any
time, except when the CP is busy recording your performance or accessing a floppy disk.
To use the Help:
1) Press the HELP button. The Help text will be displayd in the LCD screen.
2) If the text is not what you are looking for, press the INDEX (F1) button to list the HELP topics. Use the
F1 and F2 buttons to list more topics on the other pages.
HELP
3) Use the appropriate L or R button to select the topic, and the text will be displayed.
4) Use the F3 or F4 button to change the language. English, German, French, and Spanish are available.
5) To leave Help, press the EXIT button.
P. 172
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to selct a Help topic.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Searches for more Help topics on the other
pages.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
Takes you to the Help menu.
F3, F4 Selects the language.
Getting Assisted—Help and Demo
P. 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Demonstrations
There are five types of Demonstrations programmed in the CP piano.
Main Demo
An exciting and entertaining long song that shows off the CP’s musical potential as a whole.
Function Demos
Songs, Text, and Graphics that help explain the most important features and functions of the Concert
Performer.
Sound Category Demos
Each Sound category has a song, or songs, that demonstrate the sound choices and capabilities
found in the category.
Style Category Demos
Each Style category has a song, or songs, that demonstrate how the Auto-Accompaniment Styles
can be used.
Piano Music
The initial DEMO menu screen will play Classical and Contemporary piano music as long as you
remain in that screen. The songs are randomly selected from the Piano Music feature.
To listen to a Main/Sound/Style Demo:
DEMO
1) Press the DEMO button. The Demonstration menu will be displayed.
2) Select your preferred Demo piece by either,
pressing the Main Demo Song button (F2,F3) to select the Main Demo,
or pressing any of the SOUND category buttons to select a Sound Demo,
or pressing any of the STYLE category buttons to select a Style Demo.
Sound or Style categories may have more than one demo songs played in sequence. Press the
Sound or Style button repeatedly to skip to the next demo song.
3) To exit, press the EXIT, PLAY/STOP or the DEMO button.
P. 174
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F2, F3 Plays the Main Demo.
F5, F6 Enters the Function Demo menu.
SOUND
DRAWBAR ORGAN
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO
FEATURE
GUITAR
VOCAL
BASS
STRING
DRUM
BRASS
USER
HARPSI &
MALLET
PAD &
SYNTH SPECIALTY
SFX
The SOUND category buttons are used to select the demo for that
sound category.
STYLE
50’S &
60’S
BLUES &
SWING &
BIG BAND
POP &
ROCK
JAZZ &
LATIN &
BALLAD
COUNTRY GOSPEL
CONTEMP ISLAND
CLASSIC INTIMATE
PIANO PIANO
SOLO
PIANO
KIDS &
HOLIDAY
TRADI-
TIONAL
WALTZ BROADWAY
USER
The STYLE category buttons are used to select the demo for that
Style category.
• When a selected Demo song ends, another song of the same type will be randomly chosen from
another category and played. You can select another demo song at any time by pressing the
appropriate button.
Getting Assisted—Help and Demo
P. 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To listen to a Function Demo:
1) Press the DEMO button. The Demonstration menu will be displayed.
2) Enter the Function Demo menu by pressing the Function Demo button (F4 or F5).
3) Use the L and R buttons to select the topic you want to see. The selected topic’s text and graphics are
displayed in the LCD screen.
4) To exit, press the EXIT, PLAY/STOP or the DEMO button.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to select the topic you like to
see.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F2, F3 Plays the Main Demo.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
P. 176
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Piano Music
The Concert Performer has over five hours of prerecorded Piano
Music available for your listening pleasure. The Piano Music is
divided into three sections: Classical, Contemporary, and Holiday
music. You can listen to all selections in a category, or you can
program a list of your favorite ten selections from each category.
To listen to the Piano Music:
1) Press the PIANO MUSIC button. The Piano Music menu will be displayed.
2) Select your preferred category, CLASSICAL (F1, F2), CONTEMPORARY (F3, F4) or HOLIDAY (F5, F6).
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Selects the Classical category.
F3, F4 Selects the Contemporary category
F5, F6 Selects the Holiday category.
3) Use the L and R buttons to select the song you like to listen.
4) Use the F1 and F2 buttons to search more songs on the other pages.
5) Press the PLAY button (F7) to start the song. When the song is finished, another song from that will
be played at random. Songs from the category will continue to play randomly until you exit the
screen.
6) Press the F7 button to pause the song. Press the F5 and F6 buttons to return to category’s song list.
7) To exit, press the EXIT, PLAY/STOP, or PIANO MUSIC button.
Getting Assisted—Help and Demo
P. 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to select the song you like to
listen.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1, F2 Searches more songs on the other pages.
F3, F4 Takes you to the category selection menu.
F5, F6 Enters the Favorites menu.
F7
Plays the selected song.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F5,F6 Displays the song list.
F7 Pauses the playback.
P. 178
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making your Favorites list
You can make your Favorites list for each Piano Music category. Ten songs can be programmed in
the order of playback.
NOTE:
You cannot select between songs in different categories.
To make your Favorites list:
1) Select one of the three Piano Music categories. Press the FAVORITES button (F5 or F6) in the Category
song screen. A default list is displayed in the LCD screen.
2) Use the L and R buttons to highlight one of the ten locations. Use the Dial or the SELECT SONG
buttons (F2, F3) to select a new song for that location.
3) Repeat step #2 to program your ten favorite songs in any order you wish.
4) Press the SAVE button (F1) to save the edited list.
L 1
L 2
R 1
R 2
Use the L and R buttons to select a location to edit.
L 3
L 4
R 3
R 4
L 5
R 5
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F1
F2, F3 Selects a song.
F5, F6 Goes back to the song list in the selected category.
F7 Plays the song.
Saves the edited list.
Getting Assisted—Help and Demo
P. 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Preset Sounds
PIANO
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
Concert Grand
Studio Grand
Modern Piano
Electric Grand
Piano Octaves
Classic EP
Modern EP
Modern EP 2
60’s EP
Mellow Grand
Rock Grand
Hony Tonk
Electric Grand 2
Piano Octaves 2
Classic EP 2
Classic EP 3
Modern EP 3
EP Legend
Jazz Grand
Crystal EP
New Age Piano
New Age Piano 2
New Age Piano 3
New Age EP
New Age EP 2
New Age EP 3
Piano & Vibes
Piano & Guitar 2
Piano & Organ 3
EP Dolce
Piano & Guitar
Mono Grand
Wide Honky Tonk
Piano & EP
Piano & EP 2
Piano & EP 3
Piano & Organ
Piano & Organ 2
Toy Piano
Tremolo EP
EP Phase
FEATURE
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
PAGE 6
Plunger Trumpet
Trumpet Shake
Lead Trombone
Exp Guitar
Exp Nylon Guitar
Exp Flute
Lead Trumpet
Harmon Mute Tpt
Ballad Trumpet
Exp Trombone
Ballad Trombone
Lead Soprano
Exp Alto
Exp Tenor
Breathy Tenor
Growl Tenor
Lead Flugel Horn
Exp Trumpet
Closed Mute Tpt
Plunger Trombone
Closed Mute Bone
Ballad Flute
Flute Overblow
Flute Flutter
Lead Alto
Exp Guitar 2
Ballad Guitar
Pick Nylon Gtr
Finger Nylon Gtr
Ac Gtr Harmonics
Classical Violin
Dolce Violin
Classical Cello
Dolce Cello
Flugel & Tenor
Cello Up Bow
Cello Down Bow
Violin Upbow
Violin Downbow
Exp Brass
Mute Tpt & Bone
Flugel & Mute Tpt
Soft Tpt & Bone
Medium Tpt & Alto
Soft Tenor & Alto
Med Tenor & Alto
Lead Tenor & Alto
Lead Bone & Tenor
Tpt & Bone & Tenor
Exp Saxes
Soft Alto
Ballad Tenor
Passionate Violin
Passionate Cello
Quartet
VOCAL
PAGE1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
PAGE 6
Jazz Ensemble
Female Scat
50’s Ensemble
50’s Females
Jazz Auto
60’s Ensemble
60’s Ensemble 2
Pop Ensemble
Pop Ensemble 2
40’s Auto
50’s Auto
40’s Dah Bah
40’s Doo Dah
Slow Choir
Choir & String
Ooh
Bass Vocal
Choir Aahs
Breathy Choir
Voice Oohs
Humming
Male Aah
50’s Shoo
50’s Bee
50’s Doo
50’s Hey
50’s La
50’s Ooh
50’s Aah
Female Doo
Female Dao
Female Duya
40’s Doo
40’s Dah
40’s Bee
40’s Bah
40’s Shoo
Choir Aahs 2
Choir Aahs 3
Choir Aahs Sfz
Voice
Male Ooh
Male/Female Aah
Male/Female Ooh
60’s Ooh
Pop Ooh
Pop Aah
Pop Wah
60’s Wah
60’s Bop
Jazz Doo Dao
Jazz Doo Bop
Jazz Bah Bop
Contemp Males
60’s Ooh Wah
50’s Doo Wop
50’s Ooh Aah
Contemp Ensemble 40’s Doo Bee
Choir
P. 180
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRAWBAR
PAGE 1
Be 3
Jazzer
Hi-Lo
PAGE 2
Be More
Be Nice
Odd Man
Screamin’
Hollow
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
Jazz Organ
Jazz Organ 2
Rock Organ
Pedal Percussion
Pedal Percussion 2
Drawbar Bass
16’ Drawbar
8’ Drawbar
5 1/3’ Drawbar
4’ Drawbar
Full Organ
Mellow
Drawbar
Percussive Organ
Percussive Organ 2 Drawbar 3
4’ percussion
2 2/3’ percussion
Drawbar 2
Percussive Organ 3 2’ Drawbar
2 2/3’ Drawbar
1 3/5’ Drawbar
1 1/3’ Drawbar
1’ Drawbar
Soft Solo
Key Click
ORGAN
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
PAGE 6
Full Pipes
Small Ensemble
8’ Celeste
Church Organ
Church Organ 2
Electronic Organ
Mixer
Theater Organ
Theater Organ 2
Reeds
Baroque Mix
8’ Diapason
Church Organ 3
Puff Organ
Electronic Organ 2
60’s Organ
8’ Reed
Stopped Pipe
Principal Pipe
Princial Choir
8’ & 4’ Diapason
Small Ensemble 2
Reed Pipes
Posaune
Bass Pipe
Bass Pipe 2
Cornopean
Pipe Ensemble
Resultant
Pedal Mixer
Pedal
Pedal 2
Pedal 3
8’ Flute Celeste
8’ Flute Chiff
2 2/3’ Flute Chiff
8’ Flute
8’ & 2’ Flute
4’ & 2’ Flute
2 2/3’ Flute
1 3/5’ Flute
8’ Diapason 3
Contra Gambe
Kinura
Post Horn
Vox Celeste 8
Chiffy Tibia
Full Pipes 2
Baroque
Pedal 4
Theater Organ 5
Theatre Full
Theatre Tibia
Theatre Vox
Reed Organ
Theater Organ 3
Theater Organ 4
8’ Diapason 2
Pump Organ
STRING
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
Beautiful Strings
String Ensemble
String Ensemble 2
Synth Strings
Synth Strings 2
Passionate Violin
Passionate Cello
Full Orchestra
Small String Ens
Harp
String Quartet
Strings & Brass
Warm Strings
Synth Strings 3
60’s Strings
Violin
Viola
Cello
Contrabass
Pizzicato
Violin Ensemble
Cello Ensemble
String Bass Ens
Mono Strings
Octave Strings
Strings & Bell
Strings & Piano
Strings & Piano 2
Slow Cello
Harp Sweep Up
Harp Sweep Down
Harp Cascade Up
Harp Cascade Down Strings Sforzando
String & Harp
Slow Violin
Tremolo Strings
Warm Strings 2
Warm Strings 3
Strings Sustaining
String Quartet 2
Orchestra Hit
Synth String Orch
Appendice
P. 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WOODWIND
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
PAGE 6
Ballad Tenor
Exp Alto
Baritone Sax
Soprano Sax
Big Band Winds
Exp Flute
Flute
Clarinet
Oboe
Orchestral Winds
Alto Sax
Tenor Sax
Flute & Mute Tpt
Flute & Strings
Octave Saxes
Big Band Winds 2
Orchestral Flute
Orch Clarinet
Orchestral Winds 2
Reeds Ensemble
Reeds Ensemble 2
Sax Section
Classic Alto Sax
Alto Sax 2
Alto Sax Bend
Tenor Sax 2
Tenor Sax 3
Piccolo
Clarinet 2
Bass Clarinet
Oboe 2
Recorder 2
Oboe & Bassoon
Bassoon & Euphonium Pan Flute 2
Clarinet & Bassoon
Jazz Clarinet 2
Flute & Clarinet
Oboe & Clarinet
Pan Flute
Slow Pan Flute
Soft Alto Sax
Soft Tenor sax
Breathy Tenor Sax
Jazz Flute
Jazz Clarinet
Recorder
Recorder 3
Piccolo 2
Clarinet 3
Flute Key Click
English Horn
Bassoon
Bassoon 2
BRASS
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
Trumpet Shake
Lead Trombone
Solo Trumpet
Muted Trumpet
Cup Mute Trumpet
French Horns
Tuba
Flugel Horn
Muted Trumpet 2
Cup Mute Trombone Trumpet & Alto
Bright Trombone
Trombone 2
Warm French Horn Brass Pad
Jump Brass
Brass Section 2
Synth Brass
Bright Solo Tpt
Trumpet Ensemble
Cornet
Brass Section 3
Brass Section 4
Synth Brass 3
Synth Brass 4
Trombone & Tpt
Trombone & Tpt 2
Wide Horn Section
Classic Trumpet
Dixieland Trumpet
Trumpet 2
Sentimental Bone
Euphonium
Sousaphone
Tuba 2
Trombone & Tenor
Brass & Sax
Mute Brass Ens
Brass & Synth
Brass & Synth 2
Trumpet
Trombone
Brass Section
Synth Brass 2
French Horn & Strg
HARPSI & MALLET
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
Harpsichord
Clavi
Celeste
Hand Bells
Church Bells
Steel Drums
Vibraphone
Marimba
Harpsichord Octave Soft Marimba
Harpsi & Strings
Harpsi & Strings 2
Harpsi & Pipes
Harpsi & Pipes 2
Bells
Bell Lyra
Hand Bells 2
Music Box 2
Synth Clavi
Glockenspiel
Carillon
Tubular Bells
Rolling Steel Drum
Rolling Vibes
Rolling Marimba
Synth Mallet
Hard Marimba
Wide Marimba
Wide Vibraphone
Harpsichord 2
Wide Harpsichord
Muted Handbells
Vibes & Guitar
Octave Vibes
Xylophone
Music Box
Steel Drums 2
P. 182
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GUITAR
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
Exp Guitar
Nylon Acoustic 3
Steel String 2
12 String
Electric Guitar 2
Electric Guitar 3
Hawaiian Guitar
Rhythm Guitar
Ukulele
Mellow Steel Strg
Lazz Guitar 2
Nylon Electric
Guitar & Strings
Guitar Pad
Guitar Feedback
Dynamic Overdrive Jazz Guitar 3
Spanish Guitar
Folk Guitar
Folk Guitar 2
Delayed Folk Gtr
Pedal Steel 2
Delay Pedal Steel
Electric Guitar 4
Electric Guitar 5
Delayed Elec Gtr
Overdrive
Distortion
Gtr Cutting Noise
Exp Nylon Guitar
Nylon Acoustic
Nylon Acoustic 2
Steel Guitar
Pedal Steel
Country Lead
Jazz Guitar
Dist Feedback
Dist Rhythm
Muted Guitar 2
Electric Guitar
Muted Electric
Cutting Guitar
Elec Gtr Harmonics Gtr Fret Noise
BASS
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
Acoustic Bass
Electric Bass
Finger Bass
Pick Bass
Fretless Bass
Ac Bass & Ride
Slap Bass
Synth Bass
Synth Bass 2
Attack Bass
Acoustic Bass 2
Finger Slap Bass
Warm Synth Bass
Clavi Bass
Hammer Bass
Elec Bass & Ride
Slap Bass 2
Synth Bass 3
Synth Bass 4
Rubber Bass
Octave Fretless
Poly Synth Bass
Clavi Bass 2
Electric Bass 2
Finger Bass 2
Ac Bass & Piano
Elec Bass & Piano
Acoustic Bass 3
Acoustic Bass 4
Ac Bass Slap
PAD & SYNTH
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
PAGE 6
Itopia
Bowed
Metallic
Classic Synth
Classic Synth 2
Square
Sine
Chiff
Bass & Lead
Wire Lead
Crystal
Rain Pad
Analog Brass
Classic Synth 3
Fifth
Square 2
Sequenced Analog
Charang
Multi Sweep
Warm Sweep
Bowed 2
Saw Pad
Analog Brass 3
Big Saw
Octave Saw
Clean Square
Square Lead
Square Pad
Echoes
Sci-Fi
Goblin
Echo Pan
New Age 3
New Age 4
Saw Comp
Square Comp
Saw Comp 2
Chiff Comp
Warm Pad
Brightness
Atmosphere
New Age
Sweep
Polysynth
Sine Pad
Soundtrack
Analog Voice
Halo 2
Bright Warm Pad
Metallic Pad 2
Polysynth 2
New Age 2
Brightness 2
Lead
Soft Wire Lead
Echo Bell
Caliope
Halo
Synth Vocal
Analog Brass 2
Appendice
P. 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIALTY
PAGE 1
Strumming Ac Gtr
Strumming Ac Gtr 2
Picking Ac Gtr
Picking Ac Gtr 2
Mandolin
Banjo
Picking Banjo
Harmonica
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
Accordion
French Accordion
Tango Accordion
French Accordion 2 Koto
Accordion 2
Celtic Harp
Mellow Mandolin
Hammer Dulcimer
Banjo 2
PAGE 4
Shakuhachi
Sitar
Blown Bottle
PAGE 5
Bag Pipe
Balalaika
Ryuteki
Nokan
PAGE 6
Kokyu
Sho
Hichiriki
Atarigane
Mokugyo
Picking Elec Gtr
Pick/Strum Gtr
Pick/Strum Gtr 2
Strumming Mandolin
Strumming Banjo
Blues Harmonica
Wah Harmonica
Wah Harmonica 2
Dulcimer
Kalimba
Biwa
Ocarina
Shamisen
Sitar 2
Kenban Harmonica Tsuzumi
Mandolin 2
Celtic Harp 2
Cordovox
Ainote
Euro Hit
6th Hit
Fiddle
Shanai
Strumming Elec Gtr
Slow Fiddle
Whistle
Taisho Koto
Whistlers
Bass Hit Plus
DRUM
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
Sleigh Bells
Triangle
Repeating Castanet Soft Timpani
Cym & Bass Drum
Snare Roll
Melodic Tom 2
Synth Drum
Rhythm Box Tom
Electric Drum
Snare Roll 2
PAGE 4
Timpani
Rolling Timpani
PAGE 5
Bass Drum
Talking Drum
Slit Drum
Room Tom
Standard Kit
Jazz Kit
Brush kit
Marching Set
Nogaku Set
Taiko Drums
Melodic Toms
Concert Bass Drum
Woodblock
Agogo
Tinkle Bell
Castanet
Reverse Cymbal
Room Kit
Soft Timpani Roll
Orch Cymbal & BD Brush Tom
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
Metronome
Conga
Power Kit
Analog Kit
Dance Kit
Electric Kit
Orchestra Kit
Standard Kit 2
Cymbal Roll
Ride Cymbal
Crash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Crash Cymbal Mute
Tambourine
SFX
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
Applause
Seashore
Stream
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Bird Tweet
Laughing
Screaming
Telephone
PAGE 3
Helicopter
Gunshot
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
Train
PAGE 6
Latin “Huh”
Scratch
Rooster
Trolley Bell
Typewriter
Whistle Down
Whistle Up
Organ Bell
Cow
SFX Kit
SFX Kit 2
Nature
Transportation
War Games
Animal Farm
Mystery Theatre
Game Show
Counting
Car Passing
Car Stopping
Breath Noise
Cat
Horse Gallop
Crow
Jet plane
Crickets
Crickets 2
Cu-Coo
Starship
Punch
Heartbeat
Laser Gun
Kiss
Explosion
Machine Gun
Siren
Foot Step
Door Slam
Dog Barking
Telephone 2
Wind Chime
Plane
Door Creak
Car Engine
Car Crash
Trip to Japan
Bubble
P. 184
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Styles
SWING & BIG BAND
50’S & 60’S
PAGE 1
POP & ROCK
PAGE 1
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 2
PAGE 2
Fast Big Band
Fast Big Band 2
Medium Big Band
Sing It
Jump Swing
Medium Swing
Nice and Easy
Slow Swing
Night Club
Jitterbug
50’s Rock
50’s Rock 3
60’s Rock
60’s Rock 2
60’s Folk Rock
60’s Pop 2
60’s R&B
Philly Soul
70’s R&B
70’s R&B 2
Cont Pop
Pop / Funk
Latin Rock
80’s Rock
Pop / Rock
Folk Rock
Slow Rock
Disco
Disco 2
Disco 3
80’s Dance
80’s Dance 2
Classic Rock
70’s Country Rock
Rock Shuffle
Pop Shuffle
70’s Pop
50’s Rock 2
50’s Rockabilly
50’s Folk
Rock Rhumba
60’s Beach
Surf Rock
60’s Pop
Big Band Samba
Big Band Cha Cha
Big Band Foxtrot
Slow Big Band
Medium Swing 2
Slow Swing 2
60’s R&B 2
Motown
Motown 2
BALLAD
PAGE 1
COUNTRY
PAGE 1
BLUES & GOSPEL
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 2
Cont R&B Ballad
Modern Ballad
Pop Ballad
R&B Ballad
70’s Pop Ballad
Mod Country Ballad Country Ballad
Country Pop Ballad Rock Ballad
6/8 Ballad
50’s Ballad
50’s Orch Ballad
Modern Ballad 2
Modern Ballad 3
Pop Ballad 2
R&B Ballad 2
70’s Rock Ballad
Country Shuffle
Country Stomp
Boot Scootin
Train Beat
Mod Country Shuffle Country Rock 2
Redneck Rock
Bluegrass
KC Blues
Slow R&B
Fast R&B
Blues / Rock
Slow Blues
Gospel Shuffle
Southern Gospel
Fast Gospel
Slow Gospel
6/8 Gospel
Texas Swing
Country Pop
Country Two Beat
Country Rock
Modern Train Beat
Folk Rock Ballad
50’s Ballad 2
JAZZ & CONTEMP
LATIN & ISLAND
CLASSIC PIANO
PAGE 1
Showman
Pops Piano
Table for Two
Ragtime
Country Piano
Rock Legend
Toons
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
Bossa Nova
Bossa Nova 2
Salsa
PAGE 2
Modern Bossa
Bolero
Smooth Jazz
Smooth Jazz 2
Jazz / Pop
Smooth Jazz 3
Jazz R&B
Latin Jazz 2
Cont 16 Beat 2
Cont 8 Beat
Cont 8 Beat 2
Salsa 2
Salsa 3
Latin Jazz
Samba
Cont 16th Shuffle
Cont 16 Beat
Jammin Organ
5/4 Jazz
Beguine
Hawaiian
Reggae
Calypso
Mambo
Balenato
Bachata
Reggae 2
Gypsi
Boogie
Rhumba
Appendice
P. 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTIMATE PIANO
SOLO PIANO
PAGE 1
KIDS & HOLIDAY
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
Pop Ballad
Rock Ballad
Country Ballad
Swing Ballad
Pop / Rock Shuffle
Pop 3/4
Rock
Blues
Pop
Swing
Fast Show
Kids March
Kids 6/8 March
Kids 2 Beat
Kids 2 Beat Shuffle
Kids 3/4
Kids Folk 2 Beat
3/4 Lullaby
Holiday 4/4
Two Beat
Two Beat Shuffle
Bossa
Boogie
Pop
Pop Ballad
3/4 Standard
Dixieland
New Age
Swing Standard
Standard Ballad
Pop Waltz
Holiday Two Beat
Holiday Shuffle
Holiday Rock
Holiday Waltz
Holiday Waltz 2
Holiday Waltz 3
Holiday Waltz 4
Jazz Waltz
Country Ballad
Country Waltz
New Age 2
New Age 3
6/8 Pop / Rock
Bossa
Medium Swing
4/4 Lullaby
TRADITIONAL
PAGE 1
Foxtrot
Soft Shoe
Polka
Cha Cha
Dixieland
Ballroom
Tango
WALTZ
BROADWAY
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
Foxtrot 2
Polka 2
Polka 3
Cha Cha 2
Tango 2
Dixieland 2
March 3
PAGE 1
Orchestral Waltz
Classic Waltz
Traditional Waltz
French Waltz
European Waltz
Country Waltz
Country Waltz 2
Modern Waltz
Jazz Waltz
Medium Show Beat
Fast Show Beat
Fast Show Beat 2
Medium Show Swing
Medium Show Beat 2
Slow 12/8
Slow Show
Dixieland 4/4
3/4 Show
Jive
March 1
March 2
Alps March
Vienna Waltz
Fast 6/8
P. 186
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Song Stylists
16 Tons
3 Coins In A Fount
76 Trombones
Can You Feel Love
Canadian Sunset
Candle In The Wind
Candy
Can’t Get Enough
Can’t Get Started
Can’t Help Falling
Can’t Hurry Love
Can’t Smile
Can’t Stop Loving
Cara Mia
Careless Whisper
Celebration
C’est Si Bon
Chain Of Fools
Chances Are
Change The World
Chantilly Lace
Chapel of Love
Chatahoochee
Chatt. Choo Choo
Cherish
Cracklin Rose
Crazy
Crazy Little Thing
Cruisin Down River
Crusin’
B
Baby Face
Bad Leroy Brown
Ballad Davy Crockt
Beautiful Morning
Beauty & The Beast
Beer Barrel Polka
Begin The Beguine
Behind Closed Door
Benny And The Jets
Best Of My Love
Bewitched
A
Cry
A Summer Place
A Whole New World
Achy Breaky Heart
Across the Alley
After The Love Has
Ain’t Misbehavin’
Ain’t No Woman
Ain’t Too Proud
All I Have To Do
All I Wanna Do
All Of Me
Cry Me A River
Crying In Chapel
D
Daddy
Dance To The Music
Dancin’ In Street
Daniel
Bill Bailey
Billie Jean
Bingo
Blue Bayou
Blue Bossa
Blue Moon
Blue Suede Shoes
Blue Velvet
Blueberry Hill
Body And Soul
Boogie Bugle Boy
Boot Scootin’
Boy From NY City
Breeze & I
Daydream
Days Of Wine Roses
Deck The Halls
Deep Purple
Deja Vu
Desafinado
Desparado
Didn’t We Almost
Do Re Mi
Do Your Ears Hang
Dock Of The Bay
Domonique
All Shook Up
Alley Cat
Aloha Oe
Always A Woman
Always On My Mind
Amapola
Amazing Grace
American Pie
Cherry Pink&Apple
Chicago
Christmas Song
Clementine
Annie’s Song
Anniversary Waltz
Anything Goes
April Showers
Around The World
Arrivederci Roma
Arthur’s Theme
As Long As He Need
As Tears Go By
As Time Goes By
At The Hop
Climb Ev’ry Mtn
Close To You
Don’t Be Cruel
Don’t Cry For Me
Don’t Fall In Love
Don’t Fence Me In
Don’t Get Around
Don’t Let The Sun
Don’t Worry B Hapy
Downtown
Brick House
Bridge Over Water
Brown Eyed Girl
Brown Eyes Blue
But Beautiful
Button Up Overcoat
By The Time I Get
Bye Bye Love
Colors Of The Wind
Come In From Rain
Come Rain Or Shine
Comin Up Roses
Consider Yourself
Copacabana
Corcovado
Dream
Dueling Banjos
Dust In THe Wind
Could I Have Dance
Could It Be I’m
Could’ve Been
Country Roads
Coward Of County
C
Auld Lang Syne
Autumn Leaves
Away In A Manger
Cabaret
California Dreamin
California Girls
Appendice
P. 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
Friends Are For
Happy Trails
I
Earth Angel
Ebony & Ivory
Edelweiss
Friends Low Places
Friends See Me Now
From A Distance
Frosty The Snowman
Fun, Fun, Fun
Harbor Lights
Hard Days Night
Hard Habit
Harlem Nocturne
Have I Told You
Hawaiian Wedding
Heard It Grapevine
Heart Will Go On
Heartbreak Hotel
Heat Is On
Heatwave
Heaven
Hello Dolly
Hello Mary Lou
Help
Help Me Make It
Here Comes Santa
Here’s Rainy Day
Hey Jude
Hold Your Hand
Holly Jolly Xmas
Home For Holidays
Honesty
I Believe
I Could Have Dance
I Could Write Book
I Don’t Know How
I Don’t Want 2 Set
I Fall To Pieces
I Get Around
Elvira
End Of The Road
Endless Love
Evergreen
Every Breath You
Every Rose Has Its
Everybody Plays
Everything I Do
Everything Is Beau
Evil Ways
G
Gambler, The
I Got A Name
I Got Rhythm
I Just Called To
I Love Paris
I Love Rock n Roll
I Love You
I Need Your Lovin
I Only Have Eyes
I Saw Mommy Kiss
I Shot The Sheriff
I Talk To Trees
I Walk The Line
I Want To Know
I Will Always Love
I Will Survive
I Write The Songs
If I Had A Hammer
If I Were Carpentr
If You Don’t Know
I’ll Be Around
I’ll Be Home Xmas
I’ll Be Loving You
I’ll Be There
I’ll Fly Away
I’ll Remember April
I’m A Believer
I’m A Country Boy
I’m A Little Teapt
I’m Beginning 2See
Imagination
Imagine
In The Mood
G’bye Yellow Brick
Georgia On My Mind
Georgy Girl
Get Down Tonight
Getting To Know U
Gimme Some Lovin’
Girl From Ipanema
Give My Regards To
Glory Of Love, The
Glow Worm
God Bless Child
Goin Out Of My Hed
Good Golly MsMolly
Good Morning
Good Thing
Got My Mind Set
Granpa’s Farm
Great Balls O Fire
Green Door, The
Greatest Love
Exodus Song, The
Eyes Of Love
F
Falling In Love
Farmer In The Dell
Fascinating Rhythm
Fascination
Fast Car
Feelings
Feels So Good
Feels So Right
Ferry Cross Mersey
Fever
Fields Of Gold
Fire & Rain
Honey
Honeysuckle Rose
Honky Tonk Man
Honky Tonk Woman
Hound Dog
☞ The Greatest Love
How Am I Supposed
How Are Thing In
How Can You Mend
How Deep Is Love
How Great Thou Art
How High The Moon
How Insensitive
How Sweet It Is
Hurts So Good
Hustle
First Time Ever I
Flashdance
Green Green Grass
Green Onions
Groovin
Fly Me To The Moon
Foggy Day, A
Folsom Prison
For All We Know
Forever And Ever
Free Bird
Guitars, Cadillacs
H
Handy Man
Hang On Sloopy
Happy Birthday
Happy Together
Free Ride
Freeway Of Love
☞ The Hustle
P. 188
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Islands In Stream
Isn’t It Romantic
Isn’t She Lovely
It Had To Be You
It’s A Grand Night
It’s A Small World
It’s All In Game
It’s Beginning To
Its Matter Of Time
It’s My Party
It’s Not For Me
It’s Not Unusual
It’s Now Or Never
It’s Too Late
It’s Unusual Day
Itsy Bitsy Spider
I’ve Been Working
Kansas City
Lovin’ Feeling
Luchenbach Texas
Lucille
My Coloring Book
My Cup Runneth Ovr
My Favorite Things
My Funny Valentine
My Girl
My Life
My Love
My Wild Irish Rose
King Of The Road
Knock 3 Times
Kokomo
Lyin Eyes
L
M
La Bamba
Macho Man
Lady
Mack The Knife
Maizry Doats
Mammas Don’t Let
Man In The Mirror
Managua Nicaragua
Mandy
Lady Is A Tramp
Last Dance
Last Date
Last Time Saw Pari
Laughter In Rain
Lay Down Sally
Layla
Leaving Jet Plane
Let It Be
N
Na Na Hey Hey Gbye
Nadia’s Theme
New Kid In TownNew York, New York
Night And Day
Night Fever
Nightingale Sang
Nights In White Satin
Maniac
Margaritaville
Mary Little Lamb
Me And Bobby McGee
Me And My Shadow
Meditation
Let It Snow!
J
Lets Get It On
Let’s Stay Togethr
Light My Fire
Lilli Marlene
Little Dog Gone
Little Green Apples
Locomotion
O
Jailhouse Rock
Jambalaya
Memory
Oh My Pa-Pa
Oklahoma
Mercy Mercy Me
Merry Little Xmas
Miami Vice
Midnight Hour
Midnight Train-GA
Misty
Monday Monday
Moon River
Moolight In VT
More
Morning Dance
Most Wondrful Time
Mr. Bojangles
Mr. Wonderful
Mrs. Robinson
Muffin Man
Music Box Dancer
Music Music Music
Music Of The Night
My Cherie Amore
Jingle Bell Rock
Jingle Bells
Jive Talkin
Old Cape Cod
Old Devil Moon
Old Lamplighter
Old MacDonald
Old Rugged Cross
Old Soft Shoe
Old Time R & R
Old Time Religion
On Street Where U
On The Road Again
On Top Ole Smoky
One (Chorus Line)
One More Try
One Tin Soldier
Only You
John Jacob Jingle
Johnny B. Goode
Joy To The World
Juke Box Sat. Nite
Jump
June Is Bustin’
Just a Closer Walk
Just a Gigolo
Just As I Am
Just In Time
Just My Imagine…
Just Once
Just The Two Of Us
Just Way You Are
Lollipop
London Bridge
Long Winding Road
Look Of Love
Lose My Faith
Lost In Your Eyes
Love Boat
☞ The Love Boat
Love First Degree
Love Is A Many
Love In Blue
Love Me Tender
Love Will Keep Us
Loves Me… Rock
Love’s Theme
Ooh Baby Baby
Open Arms
Opus One
K
Orange Blossom
Appendice
P. 189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Our Day Will Come
Over The Rainbow
Reunited
Shop Around
Summer Samba
Summertime
Summertime Blues
Sunday Kind Love
Sunny
Sunny Gets Blue
Sunny Side Street
Sunrise, Sunset
Surfin USA
Surrey With Fringe
Sweet Caroline
Sweet Home Alabama
Swingin On A Star
Rhinestone Cowboy
Rock A Bye Baby
Rock Around Clock
Rock This Town
Rocket Man
Rockin’ Xmas Tree
Rocky Mtn High
Rocky Top
Show Business
Signed Sealed Del.
Silent Night
Silly Love Songs
Silver Bells
Singing In Rain
Sleigh Ride
Smile
P
Paper Roses
Party’s Over, The
Peace in Valley
Peaceful Easy Feel
Peanuts’ Theme
Peg
Rose
Smoke Gets In Eyes
Smooth Operator
Snow Bird
Penn. 6-5000
People
People Will Say
Physical
Piano Man
Pink Panther
☞ The Rose
Rose Garden
Row Your Boat
Rudolf
So In Love
Soldier Of Love
Some Day My Prince
Some Enchanted Eve
Something
Something To Talk
Sometimes When We
Somewhere
Somewhere Out Ther
Song Sung Blue
Soul Man
Sound Of Music
Spanish Eyes
T
S
Take Five
☞ The Pink Panther
Sailing
Take It Easy
Please Mr. Postman
Please Please Me
Poinciana
Polka Dots Moonbms
Pop Goes Weasel
Precious Memories
Pretty Woman
Saints Go Marching
San Francisco
Sara
Take Me Out
Take The A Train
Take This Job And
Takin’ Care Of
Tammy
Sara Smile
Sat Nile Is Loneli
Satin Doll
Tea For Two
Satisfaction
Tears In Heaven
Tell Her About It
Tempted
Tennessee Waltz
Tequila
Tequila Sunrise
Thanks For Memory
That Kind Of Girl
That’ll Be The Day
That’s Amore
That’s Life
That’s The Way
The Christmas Song
The Greatest Love
The Hustle
Proud Mary
Puff Magic Dragon
Save Best For Last
Seasons In The Sun
Seems Like Old Tms
Sentimental Reason
September
SF Flowers In Hair
Shadow Your Smile
Shake Your Booty
Shake, Rattle, Roll
Sh-Boom
She Believes in Me
She Loves You
She’ll Be Coming
She’s In Love
She’s Like Wind
Shoo Fly Pie
Spanish Harlem
Speak Low
St. Elmo’s Fire
St. Thomas
Q
Quando, Quando
Que Sera, Sera
Stand By Me
Stand By Your Man
Stangers In Night
Stardust
Starting Over
Stayin Alive
Stompin’ Savoy
Stormy Weather
Street Where U Liv
String Of Pearls
Summer Breeze
R
Rag Mop
Rainbow Connection
Red Red Wine
Red Roses
Red Sails Sunset
Release Me
Rescue Me
Respect
The Love Boat
The Pink Panther
P. 190
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Rose
Unforgettable
Up On Housetop
Up Up & Away
When I Fall n Love
When I’m 64
Your Song
You’re 16
You’re So Vain
You’ve Got Friend
The Way We Were
The Way You Do
Then Came You
There Must Be Way
There’ll Be Sad
These Dreams
They Call The Wind
Things
When Irish Eyes
When You’re Smiling
Where Did Love Go
Where Flowers Gone
White Christmas
Whiter Shade Pale
Who Can I Turn To
Whole New World
Why Do Fools Fall
Wide Open Spaces
Wind Beneath Wings
Winter Wonderland
Wipe Out
Wish Upon A Star
With A Little Help
With Or Without U
Woman
Wonderful Wondrful
Wonderful World
Wooden Heart
Up Where We Belong
V
Vaya Con Dios
Ventura Highway
Things We Did Last
Think
W
Wake Little Susie
Wake Me Up
Walk On By
Third Man Theme
This Masquerade
This Ole Man
Those Were The Days
Three Times A Lady
Through The Years
Tico Tico
Time After Time
Time In A Bottle
Tiny Bubbles
Walkin’ Midnight
Wasted Days and
Watch What Happens
Wave
Way We Were
☞ The Way We Were
Way You Do
☞ The Way You Do
Wayward Wind, The
We Are Family
To All The Girls
Tom Dooley
Tomorrow
World On A String
Wunderbar
We Are The World
We Built This City
Tonight
Top Of The World
Total Eclipse
Trouble
We Didn’t Start
We Wish You
Y
Yakety Sax
Yesterday
We’re In This Love
We’ve Got Tonight (Rock Ballad)
We’ve Got Tonight (Modern Country)
We’ve Only Begun
What A Friend
What Child Is This
What I Did 4 Love
What Kind Of Fool
What Would U Think
Wheel Of Fortune
True Love
Yesterday When I
YMCA
Try To Remember
Turn Turn Turn
Tutti Frutti
Tuxedo Junction
Twinkle Twinkle
Twist & Shout
Twist, The
You Can’t be True
You Don’t Bring Me
You Light Up Life
You Make Me Young
You Needed Me
You Send Me
You’d Be So Nice
You’ll Never Walk
Young At Heart
Your Cheatin Heart
U
Wheels On The Bus
When A Man Loves A
When Can I See You
Unchained Melody
Under Boardwalk
Appendice
P. 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Concert Magic Songs
Song Title
Type Lyrics
The words in bold type are the title displayed in the LCD screen.
Song Title
Type Lyrics
Christmas Songs
Children’s Songs
Hark The Herald Angels Sing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Jingle Bells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Deck The Halls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
O Come All Ye Faithful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Joy To The World . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
The First Noel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Silent Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
We Wish You A Merry Christmas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
What Child Is This? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Angels We Have Heard On High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
It Came Upon A Midnight Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Away In A Manger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
O Holy Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
O Tannenbaum (O Christmas Tree) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
The Twelve Days Of Christmas (12 Days of Christmas) . . . . . MP
We Three Kings Of Orient Are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
O Little Town Of Bethlehem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Ave Maria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Twinkle, Twinkle, Little Star . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
I’m A Little Teapot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
This Old Man . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Mary Had A Little Lamb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
London Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Row, Row, Row Your Boat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Hickory Dickory Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Pop Goes The Weasel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Good Morning To You . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Frère Jacques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
The Farmer In The Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Bingo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Itsy, Bitsy Spider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Where, O Where Has My Little Dog Gone? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
The Muffin Man . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Three Blind Mice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Old MacDonald Had A Farm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Did You Ever See A Lassie?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Ten Little Indians. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Brahm’s Lullaby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Rock A Bye Baby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Here We Go Round The Mulberry Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Little Brown Jug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
She’ll Be Comin’ Around The Mountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Whistler And His Dog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Polly Wolly Doodle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Patriotic Songs
My Country ’Tis Of Thee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Battle Hymn Of The Republic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
America The Beautiful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Yankee Doodle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Hail To The Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Washington Post March. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
P. 192
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Title
Type Lyrics
Song Title
Type Lyrics
You’re A Grand Old Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Stars And Stripes Forever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Anchors Aweigh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Under The Double Eagle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
✔
✔
Beautiful Dreamer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Ta Ra Ra Boom De Ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Turkey In The Straw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Blue Bells Of Scotland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Down By The Riverside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
By The Light Of The Silvery Moon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Shine On Harvest Moon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
American Patrol March . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Dixie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Yellow Rose Of Texas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
I Love Coffee, I Love Tea (Java Jive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Arkansas Traveler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Old Kentucky Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Red River Valley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
The Entertainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Old Folks At Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Maple Leaf Rag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
After The Ball Is Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
After You’ve Gone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Thunder And Blazes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Annie Laurie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Wabash Cannonball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
I’ve Been Working On The Railroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Grandfather’s Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
American Classics
Danny Boy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Down In The Valley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Let Me Call You Sweetheart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Home Sweet Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
My Bonnie Lies Over The Ocean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
In The Good Old Summertime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
For He’s A Jolly Good Fellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Bill Bailey Won’t You Please Come Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Give My Regards To Broadway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Clementine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Fascination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Home On The Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Take Me Out To The Ballgame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Auld Lang Syne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Michael Row The Boat Ashore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Oh, Susanna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
On Top Of Old Smokey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Bicycle Built For Two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
The Camptown Races . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
The Band Played On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
When Johnny Comes Marching Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
When The Saints Go Marching In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
(continue)
EB: Easy Beat, MP: Melody Play, SK: Skilfull
Appendice
P. 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Concert Magic Songs
Song Title
Type Lyrics
Song Title
Type Lyrics
Savior Like A Shepherd Lead Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Stand Up, Stand Up For Jesus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Onward Christian Soldiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
All Hail The Power Of Jesus Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
To God Be The Glory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Favorite Hymns
Fairest Lord Jesus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Amazing Grace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Doxology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
For The Beauty Of The Earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
O Worship The King. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
The Old Rugged Cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Holy, Holy, Holy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
What A Friend We Have In Jesus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Rock Of Ages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Trust And Obey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Sweet Hour Of Prayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Just As I Am . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Jesus Loves The Little Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
How Great Thou Art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Great Is Thy Faithfulness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
A Mighty Fortress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Christ The Lord Is Risen Today . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
It Is Well With My Soul (When Peace Like) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Crown Him With Many Crowns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Blest Be The Tie That Binds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Come Thou Almighty King . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
My Jesus, I Love Thee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
The Church’s One Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Gloria Patri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
The Solid Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Standing On The Promises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
I Need Thee Every Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Classical Selections
Andante from Symphony No. 94 by Haydn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Fur Elise by Beethoven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
An Die Freude (Ode To Joy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Clair De Lune by Debussy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Skater’s Waltz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Peter And The Wolf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Minuet In G by J.S. Bach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Romeo And Juliet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Blue Danube Waltz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Sleeping Beauty Waltz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Gavotte by Gossec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Waltz Of The Flowers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Toreador Song from “Carmen” by Bizet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
“Fledermaus” by J. Strauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Norwegian Dance by Grieg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
William Tell Overture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Can Can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Emperor Waltz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
March Militaire by Chopin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Grand March from “Aida” by Verdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Gymnopedie by Sati. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Gypsy Chorus from “Carmen” by Bizet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
P. 194
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Title
Type Lyrics
Largo from Symphony No. 9 by Dvorák. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Prelude In A by Chopin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Pizzicato Polka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Rondeau by Mouret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Voice Of Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Allegro Moderato from Symphony Nr. 8 by Schubert . . . . . . SK
Special Occasions
Bridal Chorus from “Lohengrin” by Wagner . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Wedding March from “Midsummer Night’s Dream” . . . . . . .
by Mendelssoh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Pomp And Circumstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Mazel Tov. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
✔
International Songs
When Irish Eyes Are Smiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Hatikvah. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
My Wild Irish Rose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
Hava Nagilah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB
Ich Bin Ein Musikant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Chiapenacas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Funiculi Funicula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
La Marseillaise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP
La Paloma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Santa Lucia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
Habanera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
La Bamba. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SK
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
EB: Easy Beat, MP: Melody Play, SK: Skilfull
Appendice
P. 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Chord Types
This table describes the fingering of 61 types of chords, including inversions, that the CP piano
recognizes. All these are represented here in the key of C, but of course any transposition of these
chords to other keys apply.
Entries on the chart with an asterisk (*) are easy fingerings that can be recognized in the One-
Finger mode.
*
*
*
*
*
C Maj
C7
C ∆7
C6
C b5
C sus4
C aug
C6 9
C9
C add9
C11
C13
C7 sus4
C7 b5
C7 b9
C7 #5
*
Cm
Cm7
Cm6
Cm#5
Cm6 9
P. 196
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cm9
Cm add9
Cm9 11
Cm7 11
C7 #9
C7 b9 11
C9 13
C7 #11
C7 b9 #11
C7 #9 #11
C7 b9 13
C9 b13
C9 11 13
C9 #11 13
C7 b13
C7 b9 11 13
C7 #9 b13
Cm7 b5
C7 #9 13
C7 b9 b13
Cm7 b5 9
Cm7 b5 b9
Cm7 11 b13
Cm7 b5 11
C ∆7 #5
C ∆7 b5
C ∆9
Cm7 b13
C ∆9 13
C ∆9 #11
C ∆7 13
Cm9
C∆7 #11 13
C∆ 9 #11 13
C∆9 #11 13
C dim∆7
C dim
C dim b13
C dim 11
C dim 9
Appendice
P. 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection Examples
A. Using External Speakers
The Concert Performer has an amplifier and built-in speakers and together,
they produce a powerful sound. However, for larger venues or outdoor
performances, you may need to use additional amplification and speaker
systems.
Standard 1/4-inch audio cables can be plugged into the CP’s stereo Line Out
jacks for this purpose. The CP’s Master Volume will affect the signals levels
output from the Line Out Jacks.
Amplifier
B. Using the Concert Performer with Your Home Audio System
You can connect audio cables from your stereo system or another source to
the CP’s Line In jacks. The sound of your stereo playing a tape, CD, or even
radio will be heard through the CP’s speaker system and mixed in with any
sounds from the CP itself, enabling you to play along with your favorite songs!
Connect the CP with your CD player or other device as illustrated.
A
C. Recording Your Performance with Your Tape Recorder
Even though the CP185 do not have a CD-R Drive you can still make a recording
from your CP using the Line out Jacks. Simply connect an external CD-R
recorder or other recording device (Cassette, Audio software from a personal
computer etc.) to the CP’s Line Out Jacks. Everything that you hear coming
out of the CP’s built-in speaker system is also sent out through the Line Out
Jacks and can be recorded. You can also record anything that is connected to
the Line In Jacks along with anything being played by the CP.
Tape Recorder CD Player
C
B
P. 198
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Using the Concert Performer with an External MIDI
Instrument
Personal
MIDI lets you expand the creative possibilities of the CP by
connecting it to an external MIDI device or personal computer.
Computer
Sound Module
Use a MIDI cable to connect the CP’s MIDI Out jack to the other
device’s MIDI In. Likewise, connect the MIDI Out jack of the other
device to the CP’s MIDI In.
D
E
E. Using The Concert Performer with Your Personal
Computer
Your personal computer can be used as a MIDI device as well. In
order to connect your computer to the CP you will need a MIDI
interface. Check with your local music store or computer dealer
for more information about particular models of these interface
devices. Once you have your computer connected to your Concert
Performer, you can think of it as a powerful extension of the CP’s
own music processing abilities. There are hundreds of software
programs available that you can use to do everything from learn
the basics of piano playing, to creating film scores for your home
movies, to composing the next great digital symphony.
In order for the CP and your computer to properly communicate
over this USB cable, you first need to set the MIDI-USB switch
located next to the MIDI jacks to USB. Also your computer must
have a USB driver installed. Please read the instruction on the
next page for the details about the USB driver.
If you don’t wish to purchase a MIDI interface device for your
computer, the Concert Performer has a special type of interface
built in to it that may make the connection easier. The CP can be
connected directly to the back of your computer via a USB cable.
Appendice
P. 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB
The Concert Performer can be connected with a personal computer with a USB cable for exchanging MIDI data. You need a USB driver
installed in your computer.
[For Windows XP/Me users]
A standard USB driver is already installed in your computer. You don’t need to install a new driver.
[For Windows 2000/98SE users]
You need to install the designated driver in your computer. Visit the KAWAI web site at http://www.kawai.co.jp/english/Download1.html and
download the program.
[For Macintosh users]
Currently we don’t have a USB driver available for Macintosh computers. Please use an appropriate MIDI interface and MIDI cables when
connecting the Concert Performer to a Macintosh computer.
NOTE:
When both MIDI jacks and USB jack are connected, USB has priority.
When connecting USB cable to the Concert Performer, first connect the USB cable and then turn the power of the Concert Performer on.
It may take some time to startcommunication when the Concert Performer is connected to the computer via USB.
When USB communication is unstable with connection via hub, connect the USB cable directly to the USB port of the computer.
Turning the power of the Concert Performer on/off or disconnecting the USB cable while the following actions may cause unstable
communication.
while installing USB driver
while booting up the computer
while MIDI application is working
while communicating with the computer
while the computer is in energy saver mode
* If you have any problem with USB communication, consult the instruction manual of your computer and check your computer set up.
* Windows is registerd trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
* Macintosh is registerd trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
P. 200
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Data Format
3. Exclusive data
3.1 UNIVERSAL REALTIME SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
3.1.1
Master Volume
Format:
<ll>:
F0 7f 7f 04 01 <ll> <mm> F7
VALUE LSB (*round up numbers of five and above and drop anything under five)
VALUE MSB
<mm>:
00 00 - 7f 7f (- ∞ ~ 0dB)
Default = 7fH/7fH
3.1.2
Master Fine Tune
Format:
<ll>:
F0 7f 7f 04 03 <ll> <mm> F7
VALUE LSB
<mm>:
VALUE MSB
00 00 - 40 00 - 7f 7f (-100cent ~ 0 ~ +100cent)
Default = 40H/00H
*transmitting by Tuning setting: 1e/62 - 40/00 - 60/21 (427.0Hz - 440.0Hz - 453.0Hz )
3.1.3
3.1.4
Master Coarse Tune
Format:
<mm>:
F0 7f 7f 04 04 00 <mm> F7
VALUE
28H - 40H - 58H (-24semitone ~ 0 ~ +24semitone)
*transmitting by Transpose setting: 34H - 40H - 4CH (-12 ~ 0 ~+12)
Default = 40H
Grobal Parameter Contorl
3.1.4.1: Reverb
Format:
F0 7f 7f 04 05 01 01 01 01 01 [pp vv] ••• F7
[pp vv]:
pp
vv
a: Reverb Type
Default = 4
0 = Small Room,1 = Medium Room, 2 = Large Room, 3 = Medium Hall,4 = Large Hall, 5 or 8 = Plate
00H
*transmitting by Reverb Type Select
b: Reverb Time
01H
0 - 64 - 127 (0.36 ~ 1.8 ~ 9 sec)
Default = (Preset value)
3.1.4.2: Chorus
Format:
F0 7f 7f 04 05 01 01 01 01 02 [pp vv] ••• F7
[pp vv]:
pp
vv
a: Chorus Type
Default = 2
00H
0 = Chorus1, 1 = Chorus2, 2 = Chorus3, 3 = Chorus4, 4 = FB chorus, 5 = Flanger
*transmitting by Chorus Type Select
b: Chorus Rate
01H
c: Chorus depth
02H
0 - 127 (0 ~ 15.5Hz)
0 - 127 (0.31 ~ 40 msec p-p)
0 - 127 (0 ~ 97%)
Default = (Preset value)
Default = (Preset value)
Default = (Preset value)
Default = (Preset value)
d: Feedback
03H
e: Chorus Send to Reverb
04H
0 - 127 (0 ~ 100%)
Appendice
P. 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1.5
Controller Destination Setting
3.1.5.1: Channel Pressure (After Touch)
Format:
<ch>:
F0 7f 7f 09 01 <ch> [pp vv] ••• F7
0H-fH (ch.1 - ch.16)
[pp vv]:
a: Pitch
pp
vv
00H
01H
02H
28H - 40H - 4CH (-24 semitone ~ 0 ~ +12 semitone)
0 - 64 - 127 (-9600 cent ~ 0 ~ +9450 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-100% ~ 0 ~ +100%)
0 - 127 (0 cent ~ 600 cent)
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 00H
Default = 00H
Default = 00H
b: Cutoff
c: Level
d: Viblato Depth
03H
e:Growl Depth
04H
f: Tremolo Depth
05H
0 - 127 (0 cent ~ 1200 cent)
0 - 127 (0% ~ 100%)
3.1.5.2: Controller (Control Change)
Format:
<ch>:
F0 7f 7f 09 03 <ch> <cc> [pp vv] ••• F7
0H-fH (ch.1 - ch.16)
<cc>:
controller number (0-5fH)
Default = 10H
[pp vv]:
a: Pitch
pp
vv
00H
01H
02H
28H - 40H - 4CH (-24 semitone ~ 0 ~ +12 semitone)
0 - 64 - 127 (-9600 cent ~ 0 ~ +9450 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-100% ~ 0 ~ +100%)
0 - 127 (0 cent ~ 600 cent)
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 00H
Default = 00H
Default = 00H
b: Cutoff
c: Level
d: Vibrato Depth
03H
e:Growl Depth
04H
f: Tremolo Depth
05H
0 - 127 (0 cent ~ 1200 cent)
0 - 127 (0% ~ 100%)
P. 202
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1.6
Key-Based Instrument Controllers
Format:
<ch>:
F0 7f 7f 0a 01 <ch> <kk> [nn vv] ••• F7
0H-fH (ch.1 - ch.16)
<kk>:
key number (00H - 7fH)
[nn vv]:
a:Volume
nn
vv
07H
0aH
0 - 64 - 127 (-100% ~ 0 ~ +100%)
*absolute
Default = 40H
b:Panpot
0 - 64 - 127 (left - Center - right)
*absolute
Default = (Preset value)
Default = (Preset value)
Default = (Preset value)
c:Reverb Send level
5bH
d:Chorus Send level
5dH
0 - 127 (0 ~ Max)
*absolute
0 - 127 (0 ~ Max)
3.2 UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
3.2.1 Scale/Octave Tuning Adjust(non-realtime/1byte format)
Format:
<ff>:
F0 7e 7f 08 08 <ff> <gg> <hh> <s1><s2><s3><s4><s5><s6><s7><s8><s9><sa><sb><sc> F7
bits 0 to 1 = channel 15 to 16, bit 2 to 6 = reserved for future expansion
bits 0 to 6 = channel 8 to 14
<gg>:
<hh>:
<s1>:
<s2>:
<s3>:
<s4>:
<s5>:
<s6>:
<s7>:
<s8>:
<s9>:
<sa>:
<sb>:
<sc>:
bits 0 to 6 = channel 1 to 7
value of key ”C”
value of key ”C#”
value of key ”D”
value of key ”D#”
value of key ”E”
value of key ”F”
value of key ”F#”
value of key ”G”
value of key ”G#”
value of key ”A”
value of key ”A#”
value of key ”B”
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
0 - 64 - 127 (-64 cent ~ 0 ~ +63 cent)
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
Default = 40H
3.2.2
GM System Messages
3.2.2.1: GM2 System On
Format:
F0 7e 7f 09 03 F7
3.2.2.2: GM1 System On
Format:
F0 7e 7f 09 01 F7
*transmitting when POWER ON
Appendice
P. 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 CP155/175/185/205 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
3.3.3.Effect Settings
3.3.3.1.Panel Effects Settings
Format:
[pp vv]:
a: Type
F0 40 7F 33 gg mm 20 05 pp vv F7
F0H
40H
7FH
33H
Sys-Ex
kawai - ID
channel (7f: Global)
function (33: Common Parameter)
pp
vv
00H
01H
02H
03H
Effect Type No.
b: Wet-Balance
c: Parameter1
d: Parameter2
0 - 7FH
ggH
group-ID (04: Electronic Piano , 7f: Global) *ignore
machine-ID (06: CPxx5 , 7f: Global) *ignore
0 - 7FH
mmH
0 - 7FH
llH
sub-command
data
~data
e: Send To Reverb
04H
f: Send To Chorus
05H
<data>
~ <data>
F7h
0 - 7FH
Eox
0 - 7FH
g: MIDI Ch ON/OFF
06H
function
33H
33H
sub-command
1xH = ON / 0xH = OFF, x = 0-f (1-16ch)
01H
03H
10H
Common Function mode1
Common Function mode2
Drum KIT Select for Rhythm Channel
3.3.4.Stretch Tuning Curve On Off
3.3.4.1.Stretch tuning On Off
33H
Format:
<ff>:
F0 40 7F 33 gg mm 21 00 ff gg hh nn F7
channel/options byte 1
bits 0 to 1 = channel 15 to 16
bits 2 to 6 = reserved for future expantion
channel byte 2 - bits 0 to 6 = channel 8 to 14
channel byte 3 - bits 0 to 6 = channel 1 to 7
0: off 1:on
33H
33H
33H
33H
33H
33H
33H
20H
21H
30H
40H
41H
42H
43H
Effect Settings
Tuning
Sound Control
Accompaniment Control
Chord Change
<gg>:
<hh>:
<nn>:
Acc. Mixer Volume
Acc. Mixer Reverb Depth
3.3.4.2.Stretch tuning Part On Off
3.3.1.Common Function mode1
Format:
<ch>:
<nn>
F0 40 7F 33 gg mm 21 01 ch nn F7
MIDI ch 0-f (7f = grobal)
0: off 1: on
Format:
F0 40 7F 33 gg mm 03 F7
3.3.2.Drum KIT Select for Rhythm Channel
Format:
F0 40 7F 33 gg mm 10 ch tp kk F7
0H-fH (ch.1 - ch.16)
<ch>:
<tp>:
MACHINE TYPE No, 7F = ignore (not use)
<kk>:
Drum KIT No.
P. 204
Kawai Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3.5.Accompaniment Control *SMF save only
3.3.6.Chord Change Control *SMF save only
Format:
<bb>:
F0 40 7F 33 gg mm 40 bb cc vv F7
Beat Bank No. 0-7FH
Format:
<rt>:
F0 40 7F 33 gg mm 41 rt tp bs F7
Chord Root 0-11 (C~B), bit6:Off Detect Flag (1 = Off Detect, 0 = On Detect)
<cc>:
<vv>:
PatternNo.
Music Style No. 0-7FH
MSB4bit: VariationNo. / LSB 4bit: PatternNo.
<tp>:
<bs>:
Chord Type No. 0-63
Bass Root 0-11 (C~B), 7FH = Bass Off
* ... minor
0
Intro Start
Chord Type No.
Chord Type No.
1
2
3
4
Ending Start
Basic Start
Fill Start
Stop / Parameter Off
Parameter On
0
1
2
3
Major
sus4
add9
b5
32
33
34
35
36
7
7 (b5)
7 (#5)
7sus4
9
5
4
aug
VariationNo.
PatternNo.0-3
0-7
On/Off Parameter
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
M omit3rd
*minor
*madd9
*m (#5)
*m omit3rd
M7
M7 (#5)
M7 (b5)
M9
M7 (13)
M9 (13)
M9 (#11)
M7 (#11,13)
M9 (#11,13)
M (9,#11,13)
6
6 (9)
*m7
*m9
*m7 (11)
*m9 (11)
*m7 (b13)
*m7 (11,b13)
*mM7
37
13
9 (13)
9 (11,13)
41
7 (#9)
7 (#11)
7 (b13)
7 (b9,b13)
7 (#9,b13)
7 (b9,13)
9 (b13)
49
11
38
39
40
Variation 1-8
Stop
Long Bass
Fade (ON = FadeIn / OFF = FadeOut)
Acc. SW
DrumOnly SW
Break SW
Undefine
9
7 (b9)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
5
6-7
7 (#9,13)
7 (b9,11)
7 (b9,#11)
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
7 (#9,#11)
9 (#11,13)
*m7 (b5)
*m7 (b5,b9)
*m7 (b5,11)
dim
58
59
*dim9
3.3.7.ACC Mixer Volume
Format:
<pt>:
F0 40 7F 33 gg mm 42 pt vv F7
7FH = master, 0 = drum,1 = bass, 2~5 = chord1~4
*dimM7
*dim (b13)
<vv>:
volume 0-7FH (0-100%)
60
61
62
63
*mM9
*m6
*m6 (9)
*dim11
7 (b9,11,13)
m7 (b5,9)
3.3.8.ACC Mixer Reverb Depth
Format:
<pt>:
F0 40 7F 33 gg mm 43 pt vv F7
7FH = master
<vv>:
volume 0-7FH (0-100%)
Appendice
P. 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATE: APRIL 2003
VERSION 1.0
MIDI Implementation Chart
MODEL: Kawai Digital Piano CP205/CP185
Function
Basic
Channel
Mode
Transmitted*1
Recognized
1-16
1-16
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4
Remarks
Default
Changed
Default
Messagees
Altered
1
1-16
Mode 3
X
*****
36-96
*****
O
Note
Number
Velocity
0-127
0-127
O
X
True voice
Note ON
Note OFF
Key's
X
X
After
X
Touch
Ch's
X
O
Pitch Bend
O*2
O
O*3
O
O
O
O
O
0, 32
1
Bank Select
Modulation
5
Portamento Time
Data Entry
Volume
Control
Change
6, 38
7
O
O
O
O
10
O
O
Panpot
11
O
O
Expression
64
65
66
O
O
O
O
O
O
Damper (Hold 1)
Portament On/Off
Sostenuto
67
O
O
Soft
69
70
71
O*4
O
X
O
O
O
Hold 2
Sustain Level
Resonance
72
73
O
O
O
O
Release Time
Attack Time
74
O
O
Cutoff
75
O
O
Decay Time
76
77
78
84
91
93
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Vibrato Speed
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
Portamento Control
Reverb Send Level
Chorus Send Level
General Controller
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
*6 Program Number
1-128
0-95*5
98, 99
100, 101
O
O
O
O
Program
Change
True #
0-127*6
System Exclusive
: Song pos
O
X
O
X
Common
: Song sel
X
X
: Tune
X
X
System
: Clock
O
O
Real Time
: Commands
: All Sound OFF
: Reset All Controller
: Local ON/OFF
: All Note OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
O
X
X
X
X
O
X
O
O (120)
O (121)
X
O (123)
O
Aux
Messages
X
Notes
*1 NOT sequencer mode
*2 Glide Pedal
*3 Modulation Pedal
*4 Left Hand Hold Pedal
*5 Possible to Select (default = 16)
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O:Yes
X: No
Appendice
P. 206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
CP205 / CP185
88 Wooden Keys, AWA PRO (CP205) / 88 Weighted Key, Advanced Hammer Action III (CP185)
Maximum 128
Keyboard
Polyphony
Preset Sounds
Styles
Over 900 including Drum kits, 20 User Sounds
220 Styles (4 Variations per Style)
Maximum 20 User Styles
Style Controls
Metronome
Auto-Accompaniment
Song Stylist
Conductor
Start/Stop, Intro/Ending (2 per Style), Fill-in (4 per Style), Fade Out, Sync Start, Tap Tempo
q = 10–300, 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/8, 7/8, 9/8, 12/8
Fingered, One Finger, Full Keyboard, Bass Inversion, Harmony (10 types)
700 Songs
Easy Conductor, Advanced Conductor, 40 User Conductors
Chorus (5), Flanger, Ensemble, Celeste, Delay (3), Auto Pan, Tremolo,
Tremulant, Phaser, Rotary Speaker (2), Auto Wah, Enhancer, Distortion,
Reverb (Room1/2, Stage1/2, Hall1/2, Plate),
Effects
36 Mic Harmony and 5 Mic Effects
Temperaments
Other Features
9 Types and one User Temperament
One-Two Play, 160 Registrations, Concert Magic (176 Preset Songs ),
Style Convert, Help, 4 Parts (Right 1/2, Solo, Left), 3-Part Layer, Split (Selectable Split Point),
Mixer, Master Volume, Accompaniment Volume, Transpose, Octave Shift,
Tune, Sympathetic Resonance, Virtual Voicing, Portamento, Metronome
Touch Curve Selection (Light1/2, Normal, Heavy1/2, Off, User 1/2 ),
MIDI (16 Part Multi-Timbral Capability)
Recorder
16 Tracks and separate Style, Chord and Tempo tracks,
Punch-In Recording, Step Recording, Editing capability,
The total memory capacity of the recorder is approximately 50,000 notes.
Disk Song Play (Reads/Writes Standard MIDI file format, Lyrics)
Sustain (8-Step Sensitive),
Pedals
Jacks
Sostenuto, Soft, (15 Functions can be assigned.)
Headphones (2), LINE IN (L, R), LINE OUT (L/MONO, R), MIC IN
MIDI (IN, OUT, THRU), USB for the Personal Computer, Video Out
3.5” floppy Disk Drive (2HD/2DD, DOS format), CD-R Drive (CP205 only)
200 W (CP205) / 120 W (CP185)
10” Woofer x 1, 6” x 9” Mid x 2, 3” Tweeter x 2, 1” Dome Tweeter x 4 (CP205)
8” Woofer x 1, 6” x 9” Mid x 2, 2” Tweeter x 2, 1” Dome Tweeter x 2 (CP185)
240 W (CP205) / 140 W (CP185)
Data Media
Output Power
Speakers
Power Consumption
Finish
Ebony Polish
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight (without bench)
4’ 11” x 5’ 3” x 3’ 3” (CP205) / 4’ 8” x 4’ x 3’ 2” (CP185)
430 lbs (CP205) / 289 lbs (CP185)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Concert Performer Series Digital Piano
OW969E-T 0305
Printed in Japan
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|